China EM Technology Limited EM11-G3-075 User manual
Advertisement
Advertisement
EMHEATER
User’s Manual
EM11 Series Frequency Inverter
China EM Technology Limited
Address:
No.80, Baomin 2 road, Xixiang, Bao'an District,Shenzhen ,China
Phone:
86-0755-29985851
Fax:
86-0755-29970305
Zip code:
518101
Website : Http://www.emheater.com
China EM Technology Limited
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the EM11 series frequency inverter developed by China EM Technology
Limited.
The high-performance EM11 series vector control frequency inverter has the following features:
1. Multiple voltage classes
It provides coverage of single-phase 220 V, three-phase 220 V, three-phase 380 V, three-phase 480 V, three-phase 690 V and three-phase 1140 V.
2. Support multiple motor types
It supports vector control of three-phase AC asynchronous motor and three-phase AC permanent magnet synchronous motor (PMSM).
3. Diversified control modes
It supports four control modes: sensor-less vector control (SVC), closed- loop vector control (VC) and V/F control and V/F separately control.
4. Multiple communication protocols
It supports communication via Modbus-RTU, Profibus-DP and CANopen bus.
5. Multiple encoder types
It supports various encoders such as differential encoder, open-collector encoder, resolver and UVW encoders.
6. Super SVC algorithm
It adopts high-speed response, enhanced low-frequency loading capacity and supports torque control of
SVC, which will bring you a new using experience.
EM11 series frequency inverter is a continuable and vigorous product, and we will offer customized service to our customers!
Before unpacking, please check carefully:
Whether the nameplate model of frequency inverter are consistent with your order ratings. The box contains the frequency inverter, user manual.
Whether the frequency inverter is damaged during transportation. If you find any omission or damage, please contact us or your local supplier immediately.
First-time Use
For the users who use this product for the first time, read the manual carefully. If in doubt concerning some functions or performances, contact the technical support personnel to ensure correct use.
Due to the continuous improvement of frequency inverter, this document will be updated without prior notice.
EM11 series Frequency inverter complies with the following international standards. All products have passed the CE certification.
IEC/EN61800-5-1: 2003 Variable speed electric drive system safety requirements;
IEC/EN61800-3: 2004 Variable speed electric drive system, Part 3: The Electro Magnetic Compatibility
(EMC) Standards of Product and its specific testing methods.
Note:
There are all parameters list integrated at appendix II.
First time use this inverter, please do motor auto-tuning according to “d0-30”page 104.
I
EM11 User’s Manual
Table of Contents
1. Safety Information and Precautions ............................................................................................................ 1
1.1 Safety Information ................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.1 Before installation .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 During installation .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.3 wiring ............................................................................................................................................. 1
1.1.4 Before power-on ............................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.5 After power-on ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.1.6 During operation............................................................................................................................. 3
1.1.7 Maintenance ................................................................................................................................... 3
1.2 General Precautions ............................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.1 Motor insulation test ....................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.2 Thermal protection of motor .......................................................................................................... 3
1.2.3 Running at over 50 Hz .................................................................................................................... 3
1.2.4 Vibration of mechanical device ...................................................................................................... 4
1.2.5 Motor heat and noise ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.6 Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor at output side of the Frequency inverter .............................. 4
1.2.7 Contactor at the Input/Output side of the frequency inverter ......................................................... 4
1.2.8 When input voltage is over rated voltage range ............................................................................. 4
1.2.9 Prohibition of three-phase input changed into two-phase input ..................................................... 4
1.2.10 Surge suppressor ........................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.11 Altitude and de-rating ................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.12 Some special usages ..................................................................................................................... 4
1.2.13 Disposal ........................................................................................................................................ 5
1.2.14 Adaptable Motor ........................................................................................................................... 5
2. Product Information .................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 Designation Rules ................................................................................................................................. 6
2.2 Nameplate .............................................................................................................................................. 6
2.3 EM11 Series Frequency Inverter ........................................................................................................... 6
2.4 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 8
2.5 Product appearance and installation dimension ................................................................................... 11
2.5.1 Product appearance ....................................................................................................................... 11
2.5.2 Appearance and Installation Hole Dimension (mm) of EM11 Frequency Inverter ...................... 12
2.5.3 Appearance and installation dimension of external keypad (keypad tray) ................................... 13
2.6 Options ................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.7 Daily maintenance of frequency inverters ........................................................................................... 14
2.7.1 Daily maintenance ........................................................................................................................ 14
2.7.2 Regular inspection ........................................................................................................................ 14
2.7.3 Wearing parts replacement ........................................................................................................... 15
2.7.4 Storage of the frequency inverter ................................................................................................. 15
2.8 Warranty Items .................................................................................................................................... 15
2.9 Selection Guide of braking component ............................................................................................... 15
2.9.1 Selection of braking resistance value ........................................................................................... 16
2.9.2 Selection power of braking resistor .............................................................................................. 16
2.9.3 Braking resistor connection description ....................................................................................... 17
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter ............................................................................................................. 18
3.1 Installation environment ...................................................................................................................... 18
3.2 Installation direction and space ........................................................................................................... 18
3.3 Peripheral Devices Connection Diagram ............................................................................................ 19
3.4 Instructions of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices ................................................................................. 20
3.5 Model Selection of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices .......................................................................... 21
3.6 Removal and mounting of operating panel and cover ......................................................................... 22
3.6.1 Removal and mounting of operating panel (keypad) ................................................................... 22
3.6.2 Removal and Mounting of Frequency Inverter ............................................................................ 22
3.7 Connection Terminals Diagram Description ....................................................................................... 23
3.8 Sketch and Description of Main Circuit Terminals ............................................................................. 24
II
EM11 User’s Manual Table of Contents
3.8.1 Function and description of Main Circuit Terminals .................................................................... 24
3.9 Cautions for Main Circuit Wiring ........................................................................................................ 25
3.9.1 Power Supply Wiring ................................................................................................................... 25
3.9.2 Motor Wiring ................................................................................................................................ 25
3.9.3 Grounding Wiring ......................................................................................................................... 26
3.9.4 Countermeasures for Conduction and Radiation Interference ...................................................... 26
3.10 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Terminals Description .................................................................. 27
3.10.1 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Wiring ................................................................................... 27
3.10.2 Control Circuit Terminal Layout ................................................................................................ 28
3.10.3 Description of control circuit terminals ...................................................................................... 28
3.10.4 Wiring of Analog Input Terminals .............................................................................................. 29
3.10.5 Wiring of Multi-functional Input Terminals ............................................................................... 30
3.10.6 Wiring of digital output terminals when using internal and external power supply ................... 30
3.10.7 Description of Control Circuit Jumper ....................................................................................... 31
4. Operation and display ................................................................................................................................ 32
4.1 Instruction of operation and display .................................................................................................... 32
4.2 Viewing and Modifying Function Codes ............................................................................................. 33
4.3 Parameter Display Mode ..................................................................................................................... 34
4.4 The operation of User-defined Fast Menu of Parameters .................................................................... 35
4.5 Monitoring Status Parameters ............................................................................................................. 36
4.6 Password Setting ................................................................................................................................. 36
4.7 Motor parameter auto-tuning ............................................................................................................... 36
5. Description of Function Codes .................................................................................................................. 38
5.1 Group b0: Basic Function Parameters ................................................................................................. 38
5.2 Group b1: Start/Stop Control Parameters ............................................................................................ 46
5.3 Group b2: Auxiliary Functions ............................................................................................................ 49
5.4 Group b3: Input Terminals .................................................................................................................. 54
5.5 Group b4: Output Terminals ................................................................................................................ 60
5.6 Group b5: Pulse/Analog input terminals ............................................................................................. 68
5.7 Group b6: Pulse/analog output terminals ............................................................................................ 71
5.8 Group b7: Virtual digital input (VDI)/digital output (VDO) terminals ............................................... 72
5.9 Group b8: AI/AO Correction ............................................................................................................... 75
5.10 Group b9: Operation Panel and Display ............................................................................................ 76
5.11 Group bA: Communication parameters ............................................................................................. 79
5.12 Group bb: Fault and Protection ......................................................................................................... 81
5.13 Group bC: Fault detection Parameters .............................................................................................. 89
5.14 Group C0: Process Control PID Function ......................................................................................... 90
5.15 Group C1:Multi-function .................................................................................................................. 95
5.16 Group C2: Simple PLC ..................................................................................................................... 96
5.17 Group C3: Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Count .................................................................... 99
5.18 Group d0: Motor 1 Parameters ........................................................................................................ 101
5.19 Group d1: Motor 1 vector control parameters ................................................................................. 105
5.20 Group d2: Motor 1 V/F Control Parameters .................................................................................... 110
5.21 Group d3 to d5: Relevant parameters of motor 2 ............................................................................ 114
5.22 Group d6: Control Optimization Parameters ................................................................................... 114
5.23 Group U0: Monitoring Parameters .................................................................................................. 116
5.24 Group A0: System parameters ......................................................................................................... 121
5.25 Group A1: User-Defined Function Codes ....................................................................................... 123
6. EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility) .................................................................................................... 125
6.1 Definition .......................................................................................................................................... 125
6.2 EMC Standard Description ............................................................................................................... 125
6.3 EMC Guide ....................................................................................................................................... 125
6.3.1 Harmonic Effect ......................................................................................................................... 125
6.3.2 Electromagnetic Interference and Installation Precautions ........................................................ 125
6.3.3 Handling method for the interferences of the surrounding equipment on the inverter ............... 126
6.3.4 Handling method for the interferences of frequency inverter on the surrounding equipment .... 126
6.3.5 Leakage current and handling .................................................................................................... 126
III
Table of Contents EM11 User’s Manual
6.3.6 Precautions for Installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply ............................ 127
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution .................................................................................................................. 128
7.1 Fault Alarm and Countermeasures .................................................................................................... 128
7.2 Common Faults and Solutions .......................................................................................................... 132
Appendix I. Modbus communication protocol ............................................................................................ 134
I. About Protocol ..................................................................................................................................... 134
II. Application Methods ........................................................................................................................... 134
III. Bus structure ...................................................................................................................................... 134
Appendix II. Function Code Table .............................................................................................................. 143
Warranty Agreement .................................................................................................................................... 182
IV
EM11 User’s Manual 1. Safety Information and Precautions
1. Safety Information and Precautions
In this manual, the notices are graded based on the degree of danger:
Danger: Indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe personal injury or even death.
Warning: Indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in personal injury or property damage.
Read this manual carefully so that you have a thorough understanding. Installation, commissioning or maintenance may be performed in conjunction with this chapter. EMHEATER will assume no liability or responsibility for any injury or loss caused by improper operation.
1.1 Safety Information
1.1.1 Before installation
Danger
Do not use damaged or missing components frequency inverter. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
Please use the electric motor with upper B insulation class. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
1.1.2 During installation
Danger
Install the frequency inverter on incombustible objects such as metal, and keep it away from combustible materials. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
Warning
When two frequency inverters are laid in the same cabinet, arrange the installation positions properly to ensure the enough cooling effect.
Do not drop wire residue or screw into the frequency inverter. Failure to comply will result in damage to the frequency inverter.
1.1.3 wiring
Danger
Wiring must be performed only by qualified personnel under instructions described in this manual.
Failure to comply may result in unexpected accidents.
A circuit breaker must be used to isolate the power supply and the frequency inverter. Failure to comply may result in a fire.
Ensure that the power supply is cut off before wiring. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
Connect the frequency inverter to ground properly by standard. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
1
1. Safety Information and Precautions EM11 User’s Manual
Warning
Never connect the power supply cables to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the Frequency inverter.
Failure to comply will result in damage to the frequency inverter.
Make sure that all the connecting wires comply with the requirement of EMC and the safety standard in the region. Use wire sizes recommended in the manual. Failure to comply may result in accidents.
Never connect the braking resistor between the DC bus terminals (P+) and (P-). Failure to comply may result in a fire.
1.1.4 Before power-on
Danger
Check that the following requirements comply with:
The voltage class of the power supply is consistent with the rated voltage class of the frequency inverter.
The input terminals (R, S, T) and output terminals (U, V, W) are properly connected.
No short-circuit exists in the peripheral circuit.
The wiring is fastened.
Failure to comply will result in damage to frequency inverter.
Cover the frequency inverter properly before power-on to prevent electric shock.
Warning
Do not perform the voltage resistance test on any part of the frequency inverter because such test has been done in the factory. Failure to comply will result in accidents.
All peripheral devices must be connected properly under the instructions described in this manual.
Failure to comply will result in accidents.
1.1.5 After power-on
Danger
Do not open the frequency inverter’s cover after power-on to prevent from electric shock.
Do not touch the frequency inverter with wet hand and its peripheral circuit to prevent from electric shock.
Do not touch the terminals of the frequency inverter (including the control terminals). Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
Do not touch the U, V, W terminal or motor connecting terminals when frequency inverter automatically does safety testing for the external high-voltage electrical circuit. Failure to comply may result in electric shock.
Warning
Note the danger during the rotary running of motor when check the parameters. Failure to comply will result in accidents.
Do not change the factory default settings of the frequency inverter. Failure to comply will result in damage to the frequency inverter.
2
EM11 User’s Manual 1. Safety Information and Precautions
1.1.6 During operation
Danger
Do not go close to the equipment when selected the restart function. Failure to comply may result in personal injury.
Do not touch the fan or the discharging resistor to check the temperature. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
Signal detection must be performed only by qualified personal during operation
Warning
Avoid objects falling into the frequency inverter when it is running. Failure to comply will result in damage to frequency inverter.
Do not start/stop the frequency inverter by turning the contactor ON/OFF. Failure to comply will result in damage to the frequency inverter.
1.1.7 Maintenance
Danger
Do not repair or maintain the frequency inverter at power-on. Failure to comply will result in electric shock.
Repair or maintain the frequency inverter only after the charge light on frequency inverter is powered off. This allows for the residual voltage in the capacitor to discharge to a safe value. Failure to comply will result in personal injury.
Repair or maintenance of the frequency inverter may be performed only by qualified personnel. Failure to comply will result in personal injury or damage to the frequency inverter.
1.2 General Precautions
1.2.1 Motor insulation test
Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time, or when it is reused after being stored for a long time, or in a regular check-up, in order to prevent the poor insulation of motor windings from damaging the frequency inverter. The motor must be disconnected from the frequency inverter during the insulation test. A 500-V mega-Ohm meter is recommended for the test. The insulation resistance must not be less than 5 MΩ.
1.2.2 Thermal protection of motor
If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the frequency inverter, especially when the frequency inverter's rated power is greater than the motor's, adjust the motor protection parameters on the operation panel of the frequency inverter or install a thermal relay in the motor circuit for protection.
1.2.3 Running at over 50 Hz
The frequency inverter provides frequency output of 0 to 3000 Hz (Up to 300 Hz is supported if the frequency inverter runs in VC and SVC mode). If the frequency inverter is required to run at over 50 Hz, consider the bearable capacity of the machine.
3
1. Safety Information and Precautions EM11 User’s Manual
1.2.4 Vibration of mechanical device
The frequency inverter may encounter the mechanical resonance point at some output frequencies, which can be avoided by setting the skip frequency.
1.2.5 Motor heat and noise
The output of the frequency inverter is pulse width modulation (PWM) wave with certain harmonic frequencies, and therefore, the motor temperature, noise, and vibration are slightly greater than those motor runs at grid power frequency (50 Hz).
1.2.6 Voltage-sensitive device or capacitor at output side of the Frequency inverter
Do not install the capacitor for improving power factor or lightning protection voltage-sensitive resistor at the output side of the frequency inverter because the output of the frequency inverter is PWM wave.
Otherwise, the frequency inverter may suffer transient over current and even to be damaged.
1.2.7 Contactor at the Input/Output side of the frequency inverter
When a contactor is installed between the input side of the frequency inverter and the power supply, the frequency inverter must not be started or stopped by switching the contactor on or off. If the frequency inverter has to be operated by the contactor, ensure that the time interval between switching is at least one hour. Since frequently charge and discharge will shorten the service life of the capacitor inside of frequency inverter.
When a contactor is installed between the output side of the frequency inverter and the motor, do not turn off the contactor when the frequency inverter is active. Otherwise, IGBT modules inside of frequency inverter may be damaged.
1.2.8 When input voltage is over rated voltage range
The frequency inverter must not be used over the allowable voltage range specified in this manual.
Otherwise, the frequency inverter's components may be damaged. If required, use a corresponding voltage transformer device.
1.2.9 Prohibition of three-phase input changed into two-phase input
Do not change the three-phase input of the frequency inverter to two-phase input. Otherwise, a fault will be result or the frequency inverter will be damaged.
1.2.10 Surge suppressor
The frequency inverter has a built-in voltage dependent resistor (VDR) for suppressing the surge voltage.
For frequently surge place, please add extra surge voltage protection device at input side of frequency inverter.
Note: Do not connect the surge suppressor at the output side of the AC.
1.2.11 Altitude and de-rating
In places where the altitude is above 1000 m and the cooling effect reduces due to thin air, it is necessary to de-rate the frequency inverter. Please contact our company for technical support.
1.2.12 Some special usages
If wiring that is not described in this manual such as common DC bus is applied, please contact the agent or our company for technical support.
4
EM11 User’s Manual 1. Safety Information and Precautions
1.2.13 Disposal
The electrolytic capacitors on the main circuits and PCB may explode when they are burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Please treat them as industrial waste.
1.2.14 Adaptable Motor
The standard adaptable motor is adaptable four-pole squirrel-cage asynchronous induction motor. For other types of motor, select a proper frequency inverter according to the rated motor current. If user uses inverter for permanent magnet synchronous motor, please contact my company for technical support.
The cooling fan and rotor shaft of non-variable-frequency motor are coaxial, which results in reduced cooling effect when the rotational speed decreasing. If variable speed is required, add a more powerful fan or replace it with variable-frequency motor in applications where the motor overheats easily.
The standard parameters of the adaptable motor have been configured inside the frequency inverter. It is still necessary to perform motor auto-tuning or modify the default values based on actual conditions.
Otherwise, the running result and protection performance will be affected.
The frequency inverter may alarm or even be damaged when short-circuit exists on cables or inside the motor. Therefore, perform insulation short-circuit test when the motor and cables are newly installed or during routine maintenance. During the test, make sure that the frequency inverter is disconnected from the tested parts.
5
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
2.1 Designation Rules
2. Product Information
2.2 Nameplate
Diagram 2-1 Designation rules
Diagram 2-2 Nameplate
2.3 EM11 Series Frequency Inverter
Model
Table 2-1 Models and technical data of EM11
Adaptable Motor Input
Current
KW HP
(A)
Output
Current
Single-phase 220V,50/60Hz
(A)
Power
Capacity
(KVA)
Thermal Power
Consumption
(KW)
EM11- G1-1d5
EM11- G1-2d2
1.5
2.2
2.0
3.0
14
23
Three-phase 220V,50/60Hz
7
9.6
3.0
4.0
0.055
0.072
1.5 2 5.8 5.1 4 0.055
2.2 3 10.5 9 5.9 0.072
6
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
Model
EM11- G2-004
EM11- G2-5d5
EM11- G2-7d5
EM11- G2-018
Adaptable Motor Input
KW HP
Current
(A)
Output
Current
(A)
Power
Capacity
(KVA)
Thermal Power
Consumption
(KW)
3.7
5.5
5
7.5
14.6
26
13
25
8.9
17
0.132
0.214
7.5 10 35 32 21 0.288
11 15 46.5 45 30 0.489
15 20 62 60 40 0.608
18.5 25 76 75 57 0.716
22 30 92 91 69 0.887
30 40 113 112 85 1.11
37 50 157 150 114 1.32
EM11- G2-030
EM11- G2-037
EM11- G2-045
EM11- G2-055
EM11- G3-d75
EM11- G3-1d5 EM11- P3-1d5
EM11- G3-2d2 EM11- P3-2d2
EM11- G3-004 EM11- P3-004
EM11- G3-5d5 EM11- P3-5d5
EM11- G3-7d5 EM11- P3-7d5
EM11- G3-011 EM11- P3-011
EM11- G3-015 EM11- P3-015
45
55
60
75
180
214
176
210
134
160
75 100 307 304 231
Three-phase 380V,50/60Hz
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
1
2
3
5
7.5
10
15
20
3.4
5
5.8
10.5
14.6
20.5
26
35
2.1
3.8
5.1
9
13
17
25
32
1.5
3
4
5.9
8.9
11
17
21
1.66
1.98
2.02
0.027
0.050
0.066
0.120
0.195
0.262
0.445
0.553
EM11- 18.5 25 38.5 37 24 0.651
EM11- G3-022 EM11- P3-022 22 30 46.5 45 30 0.807
EM11- G3-030 EM11- P3-030
EM11- G3-037 EM11- P3-037
EM11- G3-045 EM11- P3-045
EM11- G3-055 EM11- P3-055
30
37
45
55
40
50
60
75
62
76
92
113
60
75
91
112
40
57
69
85
EM11- G3-075 EM11- P3-075
EM11- G3-090 EM11- P3-090
75
90
100
125
157
180
150
176
114
134
EM11- G3-110 EM11- P3-110 110 150 214 210 160
132 200 256 253 192
160 250 307 304 231
200 300 385 377 250
220 300 430 426 280
250 400 468 465 355
280 370 525 520 396
315 500 590 585 445
355 420 665 650 500
EM11-
400 530 785 725 565
450 600 883 820 630
1.01
1.20
1.51
1.80
1.84
2.08
2.55
3.06
3.61
4.42
4.87
5.51
6.21
7.03
7.81
8.51
9.23
7
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
2.4 Technical Specifications
Standard functions
Standard functions
Item
Table 2-2 Technical specifications of EM11
Specifications
Maximum frequency
Vector control: 0~300 Hz
V/F control: 0~3000 Hz
Carrier frequency
0.5–16 kHz (The carrier frequency is automatically adjusted based on the load features.)
Input frequency resolution
Digital setting: 0.01 Hz
Analog setting: maximum frequency x 0.025%
Sensor-less vector control (SVC)
Control mode Closed-loop vector control (VC)(+ PG card)
Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
Startup torque
G type: 0.5 Hz/150% (SVC); 0 Hz/180% (VC)
P type: 0.5 Hz/100%
Speed range Speed range 1:100 (SVC)
± 0.5% (SVC)
Speed stability accuracy
± 0.02% (VC)
Torque control accuracy ± 5% (VC)
Overload capacity
G type: 60s for 150% of the rated current, 3s for 180% of the rated current
P type: 60s for 120% of the rated current, 3s for 150% of the rated current
Torque boost
V/F curve
Auto boost
Manual boost 0.1%~30.0%
Straight-line V/F curve
Multi-point V/F curve
N-power V/F curve (1.2-power, 1.4-power, 1.6-power,
V/F separation curve
1.8-power, square)
Two types: complete separation; half separation
Acceleration/deceleration
Straight-line ramp
S-curve ramp
Four groups of acceleration/deceleration time with the range of 0.0s~65000s
DC braking
DC braking frequency: 0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
Braking time: 0.0s~36.0s
Braking trigger current value: 0.0%~100.0%
JOG control
Built-in simple PLC, multiple speeds
Built-in PID
Auto voltage regulation
(AVR)
JOG frequency range: 0.00Hz~50.00 Hz
JOG acceleration/deceleration time: 0.00s~6500.0s
It realizes up to 16 speeds via the simple PLC function or combination of DI terminal states.
It realizes closed loop control system easily.
It can keep constant output voltage automatically when the mains voltage fluctuation.
8
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
Individualized functions
Item Specifications
Overvoltage/ Over current
The current and voltage are limited automatically during the running process so as to avoid frequently tripping due to stall control overvoltage / over current.
Rapid current limit function
It can auto limit running current of frequency inverter to avoid frequently tripping.
Torque limit and control
Rapid current limit
(Excavator characteristics) It can limit the torque automatically and prevent frequently over current tripping during the running process.
Torque control can be implemented in the VC mode.
Control of asynchronous motor and synchronous motor are
High performance implemented through the high-performance current vector control technology.
Instant power off not stop
The load feedback energy compensates the voltage reduction so that the frequency inverter can continue to run for a short time.
To avoid frequently over current faults of the frequency inverter.
Virtual I/O
Timing control
Multi-motor switchover
Multiple communication protocols
Five groups of virtual DI/DO can realize simple logic control.
Time range: 0.0~6500.0 minutes
Two motors can be switched by two groups of motor parameters.
It supports communication bus via Modbus-RTU,
PROFIBUS-DP, CANlink and CANopen.
The optional I/O extension card enables AI3 to receive the
Motor overheat protection motor temperature sensor input (PT100, PT1000) so as to
Multiple encoder types realize motor overheat protection.
It supports various encoders such as differential encoder, open-collector encoder, resolver, UVW encoder, and SIN/
COS encoder.
Advanced background software
It supports the operation of frequency inverter parameters and virtual oscillograph function, by which the state of frequency inverter can be monitored. key panel
RUN
Frequency giving
You can switch between these giving in various ways.
There are 10 kinds frequency giving: digital setting, analog voltage setting, analog current setting, pulse setting and serial communication port setting.
You can switch between these giving in various ways.
There are 10 kinds auxiliary frequency giving. It can
Auxiliary frequency giving implement tiny tuning of auxiliary frequency and frequency synthesis.
9
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
RUN
Display and keypad operation
Environment
Item
Input terminal
Output terminal
LED display
LCD display
Specifications
Standard:
6 digital input (DI) terminals, one of which supports up to 50 kHz high-speed pulse input
2 analog input (AI) terminals, one of which only supports
0V~10 V voltage input and the another supports 0V~10 V voltage input or 0~20 mA current input expanding capacity: many DI terminals
1 AI terminal that supports -10V~10 V voltage input.
Standard
1 high-speed pulse output terminal (open-collector) that supports 0–50 kHz square wave signal output.
1 digital output (DO) terminal.
1 relay output terminal.
2 analog output (AO) terminals, one of them supports 0~20 mA current output or 0V~10 V voltage output expanding capacity: many DO terminals. many relay output terminals.
It displays the parameters.
It is optional, supports panel display in Chinese or English language.
Parameters copy
Key locking and function selection
Optional LCD keypad can copy parameters.
It can lock the keys partially or completely and define the function range of some keys so as to prevent misoperation.
Motor short-circuit detection at power-on, input/output phase loss protection, over current protection, overvoltage
Protection mode
Installation location protection, less voltage protection, overheat protection and overload protection,etc.
Indoor, no direct sunlight, dust, corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil smoke, vapour, drip or salt.
Altitude Lower than 1000 m
-10°C~ +40°C (de-rated if the ambient temperature is
Ambient temperature
Humidity
Vibration between 40°C and 50°C)
Less than 95%RH, without condensing
Less than 5.9 m/s2 (0.6 g)
Storage temperature -20°C ~ +60°C
10
EM11 User’s Manual
2.5 Product appearance and installation dimension
2.5.1 Product appearance
2. Product Information
Diagram 2-3 Product appearance
Diagram 2-4 Appearance and installation dimension of EM11 series (Plastic housing structure)
Diagram 2-5 Appearance and installation dimension of EM11 series (Metal housing structure)
The housing types of the EM11 models are listed in the following table.
11
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
Voltage & Power
Housing Type
Single-phase 220 V
0.4–2.2 kW Plastic housing
Three-phase 220 V
0.4–4 kW Plastic housing
5.5–75 kW Sheet metal housing
Three-phase 380 V
0.75–7.5 kW Plastic housing
11~400 kW Sheet metal housing
2.5.2 Appearance and Installation Hole Dimension (mm) of EM11 Frequency Inverter
Table 2-3 Appearance and installation hole dimension (mm) of EM11 frequency inverter
Model
W
Appearance and installing dimension(mm)
W1 H H1 D
Single-phase 220V
EM11-G1-d75
EM11- G1-1d5
Φd
EM11- G1-2d2
Three-phase 220V
EM11-G2-d75
EM11- G2-1d5
EM11- G2-2d2
EM11- G2-004
EM11- G2-5d5
EM11- G2-7d5
EM11- G2-011
EM11- G2-015
220 126 349 334 194 Φ7
290 230 455 440 218 Φ7
EM11- G2-018
EM11- G2-022
EM11- G2-030
320 230 555 540 240 Φ10
410 320 635 610 239 Φ12
EM11- G2-037
EM11- G2-045
EM11- G2-055
EM11- G2-075
460 320 654 630 340 Φ12
560 420 847 820 348 Φ14
Three-phase 380V
EM11- G3-d75/P3-1d5
EM11- G3-1d5/P3-2d2
EM11- G3-2d2/P3-004
EM11- G3-004/P3-5d5
EM11- G3-5d5/P3-7d5
EM11- G3-7d5/P3-011
118 106.5 185 175.5 157 Φ4.5
EM11- G3-011/P3-015
EM11- G3-015/P3-018
220 126 349 334 194 Φ7
12
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
Model
EM11- G3-018/P3-022
EM11- G3-022/P3-030
EM11- G3-030/P3-037
EM11- G3-037/P3-045
EM11- G3-045/P3-055
EM11- G3-055/P3-075
EM11- G3-075/P3-090
EM11- G3-090/P3-110
EM11- G3-110/P3-132
EM11- G3-132/P3-160
EM11- G3-160/P3-200
EM11- G3-200/P3-220
EM11- G3-220/P3-250
EM11- G3-250/P3-280
EM11- G3-280/P3-315
EM11- G3-315/P3-355
EM11- G3-355/P3-400
EM11- G3-400/P3-450
W
Appearance and installing dimension(mm)
W1 H H1 D Φd
290 230 455 440 218 Φ7
320 230 555 540 240 Φ10
410 320 635 610 239 Φ12
460 320 654 630 340 Φ12
560 420 847 820 348 Φ14
700 520 956 920 368 Φ14
800 620 1232 1200 378 Φ18
2.5.3 Appearance and installation dimension of external keypad (keypad tray)
Diagram 2-6 Appearance and installation dimension of external keypad (keypad tray)
2.6 Options
Please indicate if the following options are needed when placing order.
13
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
Item
Internal braking unit
External braking unit
Energy-rege neration unit
Rectifying unit
Model
Table 2-4 Options of EM11 frequency inverter
Functions
With”-B” after the product model
Single-phase:0.4kw~2.2kw;
Three-phase: 0.75kw~15kw, Standard built-in brake unit
External braking unit for above
75kw(including 75kw)
Energy saving product makes the electric energy of frequency inverter feedback to the AC power grid.
To use the unit when many frequency inverters use the one DC bus, the way can save energy.
Remarks
The internal braking unit is optional for
18.5kw~75kw.
2.7 Daily maintenance of frequency inverters
2.7.1 Daily maintenance
Due to the influence of temperature, humidity, dust and vibration, it will lead to poor heat dissipation and component aging of frequency inverter, and results in potential failure or reducing the service life of frequency inverter. Therefore, it is necessary to do daily and regular maintenance of the frequency inverter.
Daily check items:
1. Check if the sound is normal during the running of the motor;
2. Check if there is a vibration during the running of the motor;
3. Check whether the installation environment of frequency inverter has changed;
4. Check if the cooling fan of frequency inverter is working correctly, the cooling air duct is clear;
5. Check if the frequency inverter is overheating;
6. Make sure that the frequency inverter should always be kept in a clean state;
7. Clear up effectively the dust on the surface of the frequency inverter, prevent the dust from entering into the inside of the frequency inverter, especially for the metal dust;
8. Clear up effectively the oil and dust on the cooling fan of frequency inverter.
2.7.2 Regular inspection
Please regularly check frequency inverter, especially for the difficult checking place of running.
Regular inspection items:
1. Check the air duct and clear up regularly;
2. Check if there are any loose screws;
3. Check if the inverter has been corroded;
4. To do insulation test for the main circuit;
5. Check if the terminals have arcing mark.
Note: When using the megger(please use the DC 500V meg ohm meter) to measure the insulation resistance, you shall disconnect the main circuit to the frequency inverter. Do not use the insulation resistance meter to test the control circuit. Do not to do the high voltage test (It has been done when the frequency inverter producing in factory.)
14
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
2.7.3 Wearing parts replacement
The wearing parts of frequency inverter include the cooling fan and filting electrolytic capacitor, its service life is closely related to the using environment and maintenance status. The general service life is:
Part Name
Fan
Electrolytic capacitor
Service Life
3 to 4 Years
5 to 6 Years
The user can confirm the replace time according to the running time.
1. Possible reasons for the damage of cooling fan: bearing wear and blade aging. Distinguish standard:
Any cracks in the fan blade, any abnormal vibration sound during the starting of frequency inverter.
2. Possible reasons for the damage of filting electrolytic capacitor: poor quality of the input power supply, the environment temperature is higher, the load change frequently and the electrolyte aging. Distinguish standard: Any leakage of its liquid, if the safety valve is protruding, electrostatic capacitance and insulation resistance measurement.
2.7.4 Storage of the frequency inverter
After buying the frequency inverter, users shall pay attention to the temporary and long-term storage as following:
1. Store the frequency inverter in the original packaging;
2. Long-term storage can lead to the degradation of electrolytic capacitors, and must ensure to power on for once within 2 years. And the power-on time is at least 5 hours. The input voltage must slowly rise to the rating by using the voltage regulator.
2.8 Warranty Items
1. Warranty only refers to frequency inverter.
2. Under normal use, if there is any failure or damage, our company is responsible for the warranty within
12 months. (Leave factory date is subjected to the S/N on the frequency inverter nameplate or the contract). When over 12 months, reasonable maintenance fee will be charged;
3. During 12 months, if the following situation happens, certain maintenance fee will be charged; a) The users don’t follow the manual stated makes the frequency inverter damaged; b) The damage caused by fire, flood and abnormal voltage; c) The damage caused by using the frequency inverter for abnormal functions; d) The relevant service fee is calculated according to the manufacturer’s standard, if there is contract, then it carries out subject to the contract.
2.9 Selection Guide of braking component
Table 2-5 is the recommended value of braking resistor, users can select the different resistance value and power according to the actual situation,(but the resistance value must not be less than the recommended value in the table, and the power can be bigger.) The selection of braking resistance need to be confirmed according to the power that the motor generated in the practical application systems, and is relevant to the system inertia, deceleration time, the energy of the potential energy load, needs customers to choose according to actual situation. The greater the inertia the shorter deceleration time is needed and more frequently braking, so the braking resistor needs the one with bigger power but smaller resistance value.
15
2. Product Information EM11 User’s Manual
2.9.1 Selection of braking resistance value
When braking, almost all the renewable energy of motor is consumed on the braking resistor.
According to the formula: U * U/R = Pb
In the formula:
U --- The braking voltage when the system brake stably (different system is different, for the 380VAC system generally take 700V)
R - Braking resistor
Pb – Power of braking
2.9.2 Selection power of braking resistor
In theory the power of braking resistor is consistent with the braking power, but it need to be taken into consideration that the braking resistor power will derate to 70%.
According to the formula: 0.7*Pr=Pb*D
In this formula:
Pr----Power of resistor
D---- Braking proportion (the proportion that the regeneration process accounts for the whole process)
Elevator---- 20%~30%
Uncoiling and coiling machine---- 20%~30%
Centrifugal machine---- 50%~60%
Occasionally braking load---- 5%
Other machine generally-----10%
Table 2-5 EM11 Inverter braking components selection table
Model
EM11-G1-d75
EM11- G1-1d5
EM11- G1-2d2
Recommend power of braking resistor
80W
100W
100W
Recommend resistance value of braking resistor
Single-phase 220V
≥ 150Ω
≥ 100Ω
≥ 70Ω
Braking unit
Remarks
EM11-G2-d75
EM11- G2-1d5
EM11- G2-2d2
EM11- G2-004
EM11- G2-5d5
EM11- G2-7d5
EM11- G2-011
EM11- G2-015
EM11- G2-018
EM11- G2-022
EM11- G2-030
EM11- G2-037
EM11- G2-045
EM11- G2-055
150W
250W
300W
400W
800W
1000W
1500W
2500W
3.7 kW
4.5 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
4.5 kW×2
5.5 kW×2
Three-phase 220V
≥ 110Ω
≥ 100Ω
≥ 65Ω
≥ 45Ω
≥ 22Ω
≥ 16Ω
≥ 11Ω
≥ 8Ω
≥ 8.0Ω
≥ 8Ω
Built-in as option
Add ”-B” to the model
≥ 4Ω
≥ 4Ω
≥ 4Ω×2 External
≥ 4Ω×2 External
16
EM11 User’s Manual 2. Product Information
Model
EM11- G2-075
EM11- G3-d75/P3-1d5
EM11- G3-1d5/P3-2d2
EM11- G3-2d2/P3-004
EM11- G3-004/P3-5d5
EM11- G3-5d5/P3-7d5
EM11- G3-7d5/P3-011
EM11- G3-011/P3-015
EM11- G3-015/P3-018
EM11- G3-018/P3-022
EM11- G3-022/P3-030
EM11- G3-030/P3-037
EM11- G3-037/P3-045
EM11- G3-045/P3-055
EM11- G3-055/P3-075
EM11- G3-075/P3-090
EM11- G3-090/P3-110
EM11- G3-110/P3-132
EM11- G3-132/P3-160
EM11- G3-160/P3-200
EM11- G3-200/P3-220
EM11- G3-220/P3-250
EM11- G3-250/P3-280
EM11- G3-280/P3-315
EM11- G3-315/P3-355
EM11- G3-355/P3-400
EM11- G3-400/P3-450
Recommend power of braking resistor
16k W
150W
Recommend resistance value of braking resistor
Braking unit
Remarks
≥ 1.2Ω External
Three-phase 380V
≥ 300Ω
150W
250W
300W
400W
500W
800W
1000W
1300W
1500W
2500W
3.7 kW
4.5 kW
5.5 kW
7.5 kW
4.5 kW×2
5.5 kW×2
6.5 kW×2
≥ 220Ω
≥ 200Ω
≥ 130Ω
≥ 90Ω
≥ 65Ω
≥ 43Ω
≥ 32Ω
≥ 25Ω
≥ 22Ω
≥ 16Ω
≥ 16.0Ω
≥ 16Ω
≥ 8Ω
≥ 8Ω
≥ 8Ω×2
≥ 8Ω×2
≥ 8Ω×2
Built-in as standard
Built-in as option
Built-in as option
No special instructions
Add ”-B” to the model
Add ”-B” to the model
External EM-BU3
External EM-BU3H
16kW
20 kW
22 kW
12.5 kW×2
14 kW×2
16 kW×2
17 kW×2
14 kW×3
≥ 2.5Ω
≥ 2.5Ω
≥ 2.5Ω
≥ 2.5Ω×2
≥ 2.5Ω×2
≥ 2.5Ω×2
≥ 2.5Ω×2
≥ 2.5Ω×3
External EM-BU4H
External EM-BU5H
External EM-BU4H*2
2.9.3 Braking resistor connection description
The braking resistor connection of EM11 series frequency inverter is showed as below:
Diagram 2-7 Braking resistor connection scheme
17
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
3.1 Installation environment
1. The place with indoor vents or ventilation devices.
2. The environment temperature shall be -10℃~40℃. If the temperature is over 40℃but less than 50℃, better to take down the cover of frequency inverter or open the front door of cabinet to facilitate heat dissipation.
3. Try to avoid high temperature and wet place; the humidity shall be less than 90% without frost deposit.
4. Avoid direct sunlight.
5. Keep away from flammable, explosive and corrosive gas and liquid.
6. No dust, floating fiber and metal particles.
7. Install on the place without strongly vibration. And the vibration should be not over 0.6G, Especially pay attention to far away from the punching machine, etc.
8. Keep away from electromagnetic interference source.
3.2 Installation direction and space
In order to not affect the service life of frequency inverter and reduce its performance, note for its installation direction and space and correctly fasten it.
Diagram3-1 Ventilating duct installation dimension diagram of frequency inverter
Power class
≤7.5kW
11kW - 30kW
Installation dimension
A B
≥ 20mm
≥ 50mm
≥ 100mm
≥ 200mm
≥ 37kW ≥ 50mm ≥ 300mm
Please install the frequency inverter vertically, to send out the heat upward, and pay attention to direction of frequency inverter to avoid inversion.
If there are several units of frequency inverter installed, please install them side by side, do not to install up and down.
18
EM11 User’s Manual
3.3 Peripheral Devices Connection Diagram
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
Diagram 3-2 Peripheral Devices Connection
19
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
3.4 Instructions of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices
Parts Name
MCCB
Output filter
Output AC reactor
Table 3-1 Main circuit peripheral devices use instructions
Installation
Location
Function Description
Front of input circuit
The capacity of the circuit breaker shall be 1.5 to 2 times of the rated current of the inverter.
The protect time of the circuit breaker shall fully consider the time features of the inverter overload protection.
Residual-current circuit breaker(RCCB)
Contactor
Input AC reactor or DC reactor
Input noise filter
Thermal protection relay
Front of input circuit
Between MCCB and frequency inverter input side
Frequency inverter input side / near the frequency inverter
As the inverter output is the high-frequency pulse output, there will be high-frequency leakage current. Special leakage circuit breaker shall be used when installing leakage circuit breaker at the input side of the inverter.
It is suggested that B type leakage circuit breaker be used, and the leakage current value shall be set as 300mA.
Frequently open and close of contactor will cause inverter failure, so the highest frequency for opening and closing of contactor shall be not exceeded than 10 times/min when braking resistor is used, to avoid the over-hot damage of the braking resistor, thermal protection relay with braking resistor over-hot detection shall be installed, by terminal of the thermal protection relay to disconnect the contactor.
The inverter power supply capacity is more than 600kVA or 10 times of the inverter capacity.
If there is switch type reactive-load compensation capacitor or load with silicon control at the same power node, there will be high peak current flowing into input power circuit, causing the damage of the rectifier components.
When the voltage unbalancedness of the three-phase power supply of the inverter exceeds 3%, the rectifier component will be damaged.
It is required that the input power factor of the inverter shall be higher than 90%.
When the above situations occurred, install the AC reactor at the input side of the inverter or DC reactor to the DC reactor terminal.
To reduce the noise input from the power to the inverter or output from the inverter to the power.
The frequency inverter input side
The output side of frequency inverter
Although the inverter has motor overload protection function, when one inverter drives two or more motors or multi-pole motors, to prevent the motor over-temperature failure, thermal protection relay shall be installed between the inverter and each motor.
The output side of frequency inverter
When the output side of the inverter is connected with output filter, the conduction and radiation interference can be reduced.
Between the output When the cable connecting the inverter and the motor is longer side of frequency inverter and motor, than 100meters, it is suggested to install AC output reactor to suppress the high-frequency oscillation to avoid the damage to near the frequency motor insulation, large leakage current and frequent inverter inverter protective action.
20
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
3.5 Model Selection of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices
Table 3-2 Model Selection Diagram of Main Circuit Peripheral Devices (Recommended)
Frequency inverter
Model
MCCB
(A)
Contactor
(A)
Cable of Input Side
Main Circuit
(mm
2
)
Cable of Output
Side Main Circuit
(mm
2
)
Cable of
Control Circuit
(mm
2
)
Single-phase 220V
EM11-G1-d75 16 10 2.5
EM11-G1-1d5 20 16 4.0
EM11-G1-2d2 32 20 6.0
EM11-G2-d75
EM11- G2-1d5
EM11- G2-2d2
EM11- G2-004
EM11- G2-5d5
Three-phase 220V
16 10
16 10
25 16
32 25
63 40
2.5
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
EM11- G2-7d5
EM11- G2-011
EM11- G2-015
EM11- G2-018
63 40
100 63
125 100
160 100
6.0
10
16
16
EM11- G2-022
EM11- G2-030
EM11- G2-037
EM11- G2-045
200 125
200 125
250 160
250 160
25
35
50
70
EM11- G2-055
EM11- G2-075
350 350
500 400
120
185
Three-phase 380V
EM11- G3-d75/P3-1d5
10 10 2.5
EM11- G3-1d5/P3-2d2
16 10
EM11- G3-2d2/P3-004
16 10
EM11- G3-004/P3-5d5
25 16
2.5
2.5
4.0
EM11- G3-5d5/P3-7d5
32 25
EM11- G3-7d5/P3-011
40 32
EM11- G3-011/P3-015
63 40
EM11- G3-015/P3-018
63 40
EM11- G3-018/P3-022
100 63
EM11- G3-022/P3-030
100 63
EM11- G3-030/P3-037
125 100
EM11- G3-037/P3-045
160 100
EM11- G3-045/P3-055
200 125
EM11- G3-055/P3-075
250 125
EM11- G3-075/P3-090
250 160
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6
10
16
16
25
35
50
2.5
2.5
4.0
2.5
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
10
10
16
25
25
35
35
120
185
2.5
2.5
2.5
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
6.0
6
10
10
16
25
25
35
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
21
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
Frequency inverter
Model
MCCB
(A)
Contactor
Cable of Input Side
Main Circuit
(A)
(mm
2
)
Cable of Output
Side Main Circuit
(mm
2
)
Cable of
Control Circuit
(mm
2
)
EM11- G3-090/P3-110
350 160 70
EM11- G3-110/P3-132
350 350
EM11- G3-132/P3-160
400 400
EM11- G3-160/P3-200
500 400
120
150
185
EM11- G3-200/P3-220
630 600 150*2
EM11- G3-220/P3-250
630 600 150*2
EM11- G3-250/P3-280
800 600 185*2
EM11- G3-280/P3-315
800 800 185*2
EM11- G3-315/P3-355 1000 800
150*3
EM11- G3-355/P3-400 1000 800
EM11- G3-400/P3-450 1200 1000
150*4
150*4
35
120
150
185
150*2
150*2
185*2
185*2
150*3
150*4
150*4
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.6 Removal and mounting of operating panel and cover
3.6.1 Removal and mounting of operating panel (keypad)
The operating panel of EM11 series Frequency inverter is a plug type, If you need to take it off when use or maintenance, please make sure the gentle actions, or it is easy to damage the plug type connection terminals on operating panel.
The removal and mounting of operating panel (keypad) is showed as Diagram3-3 and Diagram3-4:
Diagram 3-3 Removal of operating panel (keypad) Diagram 3-4 Mounting of operating panel (keypad)
3.6.2 Removal and Mounting of Frequency Inverter
The EM11 series frequency inverter above 7.5kw (380V) uses plastic case. The removal and mounting of upper cover refers Diagram3-5. Please use tool to push the hooks on both side of lower cover.
22
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
Diagram 3-5 The cover removal of plastic case
The EM11 series frequency inverter above 11kw (380V) uses metal case. The removal and mounting of lower cover refers figure3-6. Using thumb to unscrew and push lower cover and raise the cover.
Diagram 3-6 EM11 series layout sketch
3.7 Connection Terminals Diagram Description
Control Circuit
Terminals
Main Circuit
Terminals
Diagram 3-7 EM11 Series terminal distribution diagram
Grounding
23
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
3.8 Sketch and Description of Main Circuit Terminals
3.8.1 Function and description of Main Circuit Terminals
3.8.1.1 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of single-phase 220V model
Including model: Single-phase 220V: EM11-G1-d75~EM11-G1-2d2
Terminal symbol
P+、PB
P+、P-
Function description
Connecting terminals of braking resistor
Input terminals of DC power
/ E
L1、L2
Grounding terminal
Single-phase AC power input terminals
U/
T1
、 V/
T2
、 W/
T3
Three-phase AC power output terminals
3.8.1.2 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of Three-phase 220V/380V Small Power Standard Models
Including model:
Three-phase 220V: EM11-G2-d75~EM11-G2-7d5
Three-phase 380V: EM11-G3-d75/P3-1d5~EM11-G3-015/P3-018
Terminal symbol
P+、PB
P+、P-
Function description
Connecting terminals of braking resistor
Input terminals of DC power
/ E
Grounding terminal
R/
L1
、 S/
L2
、 T/
L3
Three-phase AC power input terminals
U/
T1
、
V/
T2
、
W/
T3
Three-phase AC power output terminals
3.8.1.3 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of Three-phase 220V/380V Middle and Big Power Standard
Models
Including model:
Three-phase 220V: EM11-G2-011~EM11-G2-075
Three-phase 380V: EM11-G3-018/P3-022~EM11-G3-400/P3-450
24
Terminal symbol Function description
R/
L1
、 S/
L2
、 T/
L3
Three-phase AC power input terminals
P、P+
Connecting terminals of external DC reactor, Normally short circuited with copper bar.
P+、P-
DC power input terminals; DC output terminals of external braking unit
U/T1、V/T2、W/T3 Three-phase AC power output terminals
/ E
Grounding terminal
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
3.8.1.4 Main Circuit Terminals Sketch of Model with optional internal braking units
Including model:
Three-phase 220V: EM11-G2-011~EM11-G2-037
Three-phase 380V: EM11-G3-018/P3-022~EM11-G3-075/P3-090
Terminal symbol Function description
R/L1、S/L2、T/L3 Three-phase AC power input terminals
P+ 、PDC power input terminals
P+、PB
Braking resistor connecting
U/T1、V/T2、W/T3 Three-phase AC power output terminals
/ E
Grounding terminal
Note: Product with standard built-in unit can realize DC bus and braking function at the same time, if external DC reactor and braking function is needed, please contact the manufacturer.
3.9 Cautions for Main Circuit Wiring
3.9.1 Power Supply Wiring
It is forbidden to connect the power cable to the inverter output terminal, otherwise, the internal components of the inverter will be damaged.
To facilitate the input side over current protection and maintenance after power off, the inverter shall connect to the power supply through the circuit breaker or leakage circuit breaker and contactor.
Please confirm that the power supply phases, rated voltage are consistent with that of the nameplate, otherwise, the inverter may be damaged.
3.9.2 Motor Wiring
It is forbidden to short circuit or ground the inverter output terminal, otherwise the internal components of the inverter will be damaged.
Avoid short circuit the output cables or with the inverter enclosure, otherwise there exists the danger of electric shock.
It is forbidden to connect the output terminal of the inverter to the capacitor or LC/RC noise filter with phase lead, otherwise, the internal components of the inverter may be damaged.
When contactor is installed between the inverter and the motor, it is forbidden to switch on/off the contactor during the running of the inverter, otherwise, there will be large current flowing into the inverter, triggering the inverter protection action.
Length of cable between the inverter and motor
If the cable between the inverter and the motor is too long, the higher harmonic leakage current of the output end will produce by adverse impact on the inverter and the peripheral devices. It is suggested that when the motor cable is longer than 100m, output AC reactor be installed. Refer to the following table for the carrier frequency setting.
Length of cable between the inverter and motor
Less than 50m
Less than 100 m
More than 100m
Carrier frequency (d6-00)
Less than 15kHz
Less than 10kHz
Less than 5kHz
25
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
3.9.3 Grounding Wiring
The inverter will produce leakage current. The higher the carrier frequency is, the larger the leakage current will be. The leakage current of the inverter system is more than 3.5mA, and the specific value of the leakage current is determined by the use conditions. To ensure the safety, the inverter and the motor must be grounded.
The grounding resistance shall be less than 10ohm. For the grounding wire diameter requirement, refer to 2.6 electrotype of main circuit peripheral devices.
Do not share grounding wire with the welding machine and other power equipment.
In the applications with more than 2 inverters, keep the grounding wire from forming a loop.
Diagram 3-8 Grounding Wire Connection Sketch Map
3.9.4 Countermeasures for Conduction and Radiation Interference
Diagram 3-9 Connection of conduction and radiation interference solutions
When the input noise filter is installed, the wire connecting the filter to the inverter input power end shall be as short as possible.
The filter enclosure and mounting cabinet shall be reliably grounded in large area to reduce the back flow impedance of the noise current Ig.
The wire connecting the inverter and the motor shall be as short as possible. The motor cable adopts
4-core cable, with the grounding end grounded at the inverter side, the other end connected to the motor enclosure. The motor cable shall be sleeved into the metal tube.
The input power wire and output motor wire shall be kept away from each other as far as possible.
The equipment and signal cables vulnerable to influence shall be kept far away from the inverter.
Key signal cables shall adopt shielding cable. It is suggested that the shielding layer shall be grounded with 360-degree grounding method and sleeved into the metal tube. The signal cable shall be kept far away from the inverter input wire and output motor wire. If the signal cable must cross the input wire and output motor wire, they shall be kept orthogonal.
When analog voltage and current signals are adopted for remote frequency setting, twinning shielding cable shall be used. The shielding layer shall be connected to the grounding terminal PE of the inverter, and the signal cable shall be no longer than 50m.
The wires of the control circuit terminals RA/RB/RC and other control circuit terminals shall be separately routed.
26
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
It is forbidden to short circuit the shielding layer and other signal cables and the equipment.
When the inverter is connected to the inductive load equipment (e.g. electromagnetic contactor, relay and solenoid valve), surge suppressor must be installed on the load equipment coil, as showed in
Diagram 3-10
Diagram 3-10 Application example of inductive load surge suppressor
3.10 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Terminals Description
3.10.1 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Wiring
Diagram 3-11 Control Circuit and Main Circuit Wiring
27
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
3.10.2 Control Circuit Terminal Layout
Diagram 3-12 EM11 Control Circuit Terminal Sketch Map
3.10.3 Description of control circuit terminals
Type
Power
Supply
Analog input
Digital input
Analog output
Terminal
Symbol
+10V-GND
+24V-COM
J4
AI1-GND
AI2-GND
DI1
DI2
DI3
DI4
DI5
HDI
AO1-GND
AO2-GND
Table 3-4 Description of control circuit terminals
Terminal
Name
Terminal function description
External
+10V power supply
External
+24V power supply
Provide +10V power supply to external unit. Maximum output current:10mA
Generally, it provides power supply to external potentiometer with resistance range of 1 kΩ~5kΩ
Provide +24 V power supply to external unit. Generally, it provides power supply to DI/DO terminals and external sensors. Maximum output current: 200 mA
External power supply input terminal
Analog input terminal 1
Analog input terminal 2
Connect to +24 V by default.
When DI1-DI6 need to be driven by external signal, J4 must switch to be “OFF” status.
1. Input voltage range: DC 0V~10 V
2. Input Impedance: 22 kΩ
1. Input range: DC 0V~10V/ 0mA~20mA, decided by jumper J5 on the control board
2. Impedance: 22 kΩ (voltage input), 500 Ω (current input)
Digital input
1
Digital input
2
Digital input
3
Digital input
4
Digital input
5
1. Optical coupling isolation, compatible with dual polarity input
2.Input Impedance: 2.4 kΩ
3. Voltage range for level input: 9V~30 V
High Speed
Pulse Input
Terminal
Besides features of DI1~DI5 and it can be used for high-speed pulse input.
Maximum input frequency: 50 kHz
Analog output terminal 1
Voltage or current output is decided by jumper J6.
Output voltage range: 0V~10 V
Output current range: 0mA~20 mA
Analog output terminal 2
Output voltage range: 0V~10V
28
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter
Type
Digital output
Relay output
Terminal
Symbol
DO1-CME
FM- COM
FM- COM
Terminal
Name
Digital output
1
High Speed
Pulse Output
Terminal
High Speed
Pulse Output
Terminal
Terminal function description
Optical coupling isolation, dual polarity open collector output.
Output voltage range: 0V~24 V
Output current range: 0mA~50 mA
Note that CME and COM are internally insulated, but they are shorted by jumper externally by factory default. In this case DO1 is driven by +24 V, If you want to drive DO1 by external power supply, please remove jumper between
CME and COM.
It is set by b4-00 (FM terminal output mode selection)
As high-speed pulse output, the maximum frequency hits
100 kHz.
As open-collector output, its function is the same as that of
DO1.
It is set by b4-00 (FM terminal output mode selection)
As high-speed pulse output, the maximum frequency hits
100 kHz.
As open-collector output, its function is the same as that of
DO1.
Auxiliary interface
JP1
J8
Extension card interface
PG card interface
Connect to an optional card (I/O extension card, PLC card and various bus cards)
Support various types of PG cards: OC, differential, UVW
ABZ and resolver.
3.10.4 Wiring of Analog Input Terminals
When the voltage signal is used as analog input, it is vulnerable from outside interference. Please use shielding cable, and ensure that the shielding cable reliably connect to the grounding. The cable should be as short as possible, and keep away from power lines. In serious interference occasions, you might consider to add a filter capacitor or ferrite core in signal cable.
Diagram 3-13 Wiring of analog input terminals
29
3. Installation of Frequency Inverter EM11 User’s Manual
3.10.5 Wiring of Multi-functional Input Terminals
Diagram 3-14 Wiring of digital input terminals in four different modes
3.10.6 Wiring of digital output terminals when using internal and external power supply
3-15 Internal power supply wiring 3-16 External power supply wiring
Note: When external power supply is adopted, please connect negative end of external power supply with terminal COM. The maximum current of open-collector output is 50mA.If the external load is a relay,
30
EM11 User’s Manual 3. Installation of Frequency Inverter please install a fly-wheel diode to the two sides of relay. Please correctly install the polarity of fly-wheel diode, otherwise control card and DSP can be damaged.
3.10.7 Description of Control Circuit Jumper
4. Operation and display EM11 User’s Manual
4. Operation and display
4.1 Instruction of operation and display
Jumper Name
J3
Function Description
When the jumper is “ON”, it connects with 485 communication resistor.
Default Setting
OFF
When the jumper is “OFF”, it disconnects with 485 communication resistor
J4
When the jumper is “ON”, DI terminals use internal power supply.
When the jumper is “OFF’, DI terminals use external power supply.
ON
J5
J6
When the jumper is “V”, AI2 is with voltage input (0V~10V).
When the jumper is “I”, AI2 is with current input (0mA~20mA).
When the jumper is “V”, AO1 is with voltage output (0V~10V).
When the jumper is “I”, AO1 is with current output (0mA~20mA).
V
V
Diagram 4-1 EM11 main keypad
31
1. Description of indicator
32
Diagram 4-2 EM11-G1/G3E keypad
EM11 User’s Manual 4. Operation and display
RUN: OFF indicates that the frequency inverter is in the stop state and ON indicates that the frequency inverter is in the running state.
LOCAL: It indicates whether the frequency inverter is operated by operation keypad, terminals or remoter
(communication). OFF indicates keypad operation control state; ON indicates terminals operation control state; Blinking indicates remote operation control state.
DIR: It is Forward/Reversal indicator, ON indicates forward rotation.
TRIP: Tunning/ Torque Control/Fault indicator
When the indicator is ON, it indicates torque control mode. When the indicator is blinking slowly, it indicates the auto-tuning state. When the indicator is blinking quickly, it indicates the fault state.
2. Unit indicator
Hz: frequency unit;
A: Current unit;
V: Voltage unit
3. Digital display area
The 5-digit LED display is able to display the set frequency, output frequency, monitoring data and fault codes.
4. Description of Keys on the Operation panel (keypad)
Table 4-1 Keypad function table
Key
PRG/ESC
Name
Programming
Enter or exit menu level I.
Function
DATA/ENTER
Confirmation
Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and confirm the parameter setting.
Increment
Increase data or function code.
Decrement
Decrease data or function code.
Shift
Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or running state, and select the digit to be modified when modifying parameters.
RUN
RUN
Start the frequency inverter in the operation panel control mode.
STOP/RESET
Stop/Reset
Stop the frequency inverter when it is in the running state and perform the reset operation when it is in the fault state. The functions of this key are restricted by b9-00.
MF.K
QUICK
Multi-function Perform function switchover according to the setting of b9-01
Menu mode selection
Perform switchover between menu modes according to the setting of A0-08(The default is a menu mode).
4.2 Viewing and Modifying Function Codes
The operation panel of the EM11 adopts three-level menu.
The three-level menu consists of function code group (Level I), function code (Level II), and function code setting value (level III), as shown in the following figure.
33
4. Operation and display EM11 User’s Manual
Diagram 4-3 Operation procedure on the operation panel
Instruction: We can return to level II menu from Level III menu by pressing PRG or ENTER.
The difference between them is:
After you press ENTER, the system saves the parameter setting first, and then goes back to Level II menu and shifts to the next function code.
After you press PRG, the system does not save the parameter setting, but directly returns to Level II menu and remains at the present function code.
Under the Level III state, if there is no blinking digit of this parameter, then it indicates that the parameter can not to be modified. The possible reasons are:
1. This function code is a non-modifiable parameter, such as the actual testing parameters, operation records, etc.
2. This function code cannot be modified under the running state, but can modify after stopping.
4.3 Parameter Display Mode
The establishment of parameter display is to make the user conveniently to check the parameters in different permutation modes. Three kinds of parameter display modes are offered.
Name Description
Function parameter mode sequential display the function parameters of frequency inverter, includes parameter group b0~bF, C0~C6, d0~d6, A0~A1 and U0
Customized parameter mode
Several function parameters (max 32)customized to display are need to confirmed by Group A1
Modifiable parameter mode The function parameters can be different with the factory parameter
Relevant function parameters are A0-08, as follows:
Code Parameter Name
A0-08
Display of customized parameter
Setting Range
Bit: User-defined parameter QUICK display selection.
0: No Display
1: Display
Ten bit: User-changed parameter QUICK display selection.
0: No Display
1: Display
Default
0
When user defined customized parameters, at this time user can switch into different parameter display mode by the QUICK key.
All parameter display mode display the code as follows:
34
EM11 User’s Manual
Parameter Display Mode
Base mode
User-defined mode
User-modified mode
Switching mode is as follows:
Display
-dFLt
-user
-chGd
4. Operation and display
Diagram 4-4 Quick viewing mode of function codes
4.4 The operation of User-defined Fast Menu of Parameters
User-defined menu is set to facilitate user to quickly view and modify the commonly used function codes.
In this mode, the display parameter “ub0.02” is function code “b0-02”. User also can modify parameters value in this menu, the effect is same as modifying in common menu.
The user-defined parameters set by group A1. If A1 is set to A0.00, it indicates that no function codes are available. The max 32 parameters can be defined in group A1. If "NULL" is displayed, it indicates that the user-defined menu is empty.
A total of 16 parameters are pre-stored in the user-defined fast menu, as listed in the following table. b0-02 Command source selection b0-03 Main frequency source X selection b0-07 Frequency source selection b1-10 Stop mode
35
4. Operation and display EM11 User’s Manual d2-00 V/F curve setting
User can modify the user-defined fast menu based on actual requirements.
4.5 Monitoring Status Parameters
In the stop or running state, you can press “ ” on the operation panel to display status parameters.
Whether parameters are displayed is determined by the binary bits of values converted from the values of b9-02(running parameter 1), b9-03(running parameter 2), and b9-04(stopping parameter) in the hexadecimal format.
In stop state, there are 16 status parameters you can select to displayed or not, they are: setting frequency, bus voltage, DI input status, DO output status, analog input AI1 voltage, analog input AI2 voltage, analog input AI3 voltage, count value, length value, PLC running step, load speed, PID setting, PULSE input frequency and three reserved parameters.
In running state, there are five running state parameters: running frequency, setting frequency, bus voltage, output voltage and output current. This five parameters are default displaying. The other display parameter includes output power, output torque, DI input status, DO output status, analog input AI1 voltage, analog input AI2 voltage, analog input AI3 voltage, count value, length value, linear speed, PID setting, PID feedback, etc. You can set whether these parameters are displayed by setting b9-02 and b9-03.
When the frequency inverter is repowered on again after power failure, the parameters are recorded as before power failure and displaying.
4.6 Password Setting
The frequency inverter provides the user password protection function. When A0-00 is set to a non-zero value, the value is the user password. The password takes effect after you exit the function code editing state. When you press PRG key, “------” will be displayed, and you must enter the correct user password to enter the menu.
To cancel the password protection function, enter with password and set A0-00 to 0.
4.7 Motor parameter auto-tuning
Select vector control running mode, before frequency inverter start to operate, you must accurately write in the nameplate parameter of motor by keypad. EM11 frequency inverter will match standard motor parameter according to the nameplate; the vector control mode strongly depended on motor’s parameters, if you want to get good control performance, then you must let inverter to obtain the exact parameters of controlled motor.
The process of motor auto-tuning is as follows:
Firstly, select command source (b0-03) as keypad command channel. Then write in the actual motor parameters as the following parameters (according to the nameplate of present motor):
36
EM11 User’s Manual 4. Operation and display
Motor
Motor 1 b0-00:Motor Type Selection d0-01:Motor Rated Voltage d0-03:Motor Rated Frequency
Parameter
d0-00:Motor Rated Power d0-02:Motor Rated Current d0-04:Motor Rated Speed
Motor 2 b0-00:Motor Type Selection d2-01:Motor Rated Voltage d2-03:Motor Rated Frequency d2-00:Motor Rated Power d2-02:Motor Rated Current d2-04:Motor Rated Speed
AC asynchronous motor tuning
If the motor can be disconnected from the load, then please set d0-30/d2-30 to 2(asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning), then press the RUN key on the keypad. The frequency inverter will automatically calculate the following parameters of motor:
Motor Parameter
Motor 1 d0-05:Stator resistance (asynchronous motor) d0-06:Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor) d0-07:Leakage inductive reactance(asynchronous motor) d0-08:Mutual inductive reactance(asynchronous motor) d0-09:No-load current(asynchronous motor)
Motor 2 d2-05:Stator resistance (asynchronous motor) d2-06:Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor) d2-07:Leakage inductive reactance(asynchronous motor) d2-08:Mutual inductive reactance(asynchronous motor) d2-09:No-load current(asynchronous motor)
Finish motor parameter auto-tuning.
If the motor cannot be fully disconnected with the load, then please select d0-30/d2-30 as 1 (asynchronous static auto-tuning), and press the RUN key in the keypad panel.
And the frequency inverter will automatically calculate the following parameters of motor:
Motor Parameter
Motor 1 d0-05:Stator resistance (asynchronous motor) d0-06:Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor) d0-07:Leakage inductive reactance(asynchronous motor)
Motor 2 d2-05:Stator resistance (asynchronous motor) d2-06:Rotor resistance (asynchronous motor) d2-07:Leakage inductive reactance(asynchronous motor)
Description of synchronous motor identification:
As the EM11 driven synchronous machine system needs the feedback signal from encoder, so uses need to correctly set the parameter of encoder before identification.
During the identification process of synchronous system, rotation movement is needed. The best identification method is no-load dynamic running identification, if the condition is not allowed; with-load dynamic identification is workable.
37
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
5. Description of Function Codes
5.1 Group b0: Basic Function Parameters
Code
b0-00
Parameter Name
Motor type selection
Setting Range
Unit’s digit: Motor 1 selection
Ten’s digit: Motor 2 selection
0: AC asynchronous motor
1: Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
Unit’s digit: 0- select Motor 1 as AC asynchronous motor;
1-select Motor 1 as Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
Ten’s digit: 0-select Motor 2 as AC asynchronous motor;
1-select Motor 2 as Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
b0-01 Motor control mode
Unit's digit: Motor 1 control mode selection.
Ten's digit: Motor 2 control mode selection.
0: Sensor-less vector control (SVC)
1: Closed-loop vector control (VC)
2:V/F control
Hundred’s digit/Thousand’s digit: reserved
Ten thousand’s digit: Motor selection
Default
0
Default
0
0: Motor 1
1: Motor 2
Unit’s digit and Ten’s digit is to select motor 1 and motor 2 control mode.
0: Sensor less vector control (SVC)
It indicates open-loop vector control, and is applicable to high-performance control applications such as machine tool, centrifuge, wire drawing machine and injection molding machine. One frequency inverter can operate only one motor.
1: Closed-loop vector control (VC)
It is applicable to high-accuracy speed control or torque control applications such as high-speed paper making machine, crane and elevator. One Frequency inverter can operate only one motor. An encoder must be installed at the motor side, and a PG card matching the encoder must be installed at the frequency inverter side.
2: Voltage/Frequency (V/F) control
It is applicable to applications with low requirements or applications where one frequency inverter operates multiple motors, such as fan and pump.
Note: If vector control is used, motor auto-tuning must be performed because the advantages of vector control can only be utilized after correct motor parameters are obtained. Better performance can be achieved by adjusting speed regulator parameters in group “d”.
For the permanent magnetic synchronous motor (PMSM), the EM11 does not support SVC. VC is used generally. In some low requirements applications, you can also use V/F.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
0: Keypad control (LED off) selection 1: Terminal control (LED on)
2: Communication control (LED blinking)
0
It is used to determine the input channel of the frequency inverter control commands, such as run, stop, forward rotation, reverse rotation and jog operation. You can input the commands in the following three channels:
0: Keypad control ("LOCAL/REMOT" indicator off)
38
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Commands are given by pressing keys “RUN” and “STOP/RESET” on the operation panel.
1: Terminal control ("LOCAL/REMOT" indicator on)
Commands are given by means of multifunctional input terminals with functions such as FWD, REV, JOGF, and JOGR.
2: Communication control ("LOCAL/REMOT" indicator blinking)
Commands are given from host computer. For more details please refer to the appendix of communication protocol.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
0: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
Default
UP/DOWN modifiable, no-record after power off) b0-03
Main frequency source X selection
1: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, record after power off)
2: AI1
0
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7:Built-in PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
It is used to select the setting channel of the main frequency. You can set the main frequency in the following 10 channels:
0: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12, UP/DOWN modifiable, not record at power failure)
The initial value of the set frequency is the value of b0-12 (Preset frequency). You can change the set frequency by pressing and on the operation panel (or using the UP/DOWN function of input terminals).
When the Frequency inverter is powered on again after power failure, the set frequency reverts to the value of b0-12.
1: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12, UP/DOWN modifiable, record at power failure)
The initial value of the set frequency is the value of b0-12 (Preset frequency). You can change the set frequency by pressing keys and on the operation panel (or using the UP/DOWN functions of input terminals).
When the frequency inverter is powered on again after power failure, the setting frequency is the value memorized at the moment of the last power failure.
Note that b0-10 (record digital setting frequency of power failure) determines whether the set frequency is memorized or cleared when the frequency inverter stops. It is related to stopping rather than power failure.
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
The frequency is set by analog input. The EM11 control board provides two analog input (AI) terminals
(AI1, AI2). Another AI terminal (AI3) is provided by the I/O extension card.
Including:
AI1: 0V~10 V voltage input;
AI2: 0V~10 V voltage input or 4mA~20 mA current input, determined by jumper on the control card;
AI3: -10V~10 V voltage input
The corresponding relationship curve between the input voltage of AI1, AI2 and AI3 and the target frequency can be user-defined.
When AI is used as the frequency setting source, the corresponding value 100% of the voltage/current input corresponds to the value of b0-13 (Maximum frequency).
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
The frequency is set by DI6 (high-speed pulse). The signal specification of pulse setting is 9V~30V (voltage range) and 0 kHz~100 kHz (frequency range). Pulse can be only input by DI6.
39
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
The relation between DI6 terminal input pulse frequency and corresponding setting is set by b5-00~ b5-03.
The corresponding relation is the linear relation of these two points. The corresponding value 100% of pulse setting corresponds to the value of b0-13 (Maximum frequency).
6: Multi-function
In Multi-segment speed mode, combinations of different DI terminal states correspond to different set frequencies. The EM11 supports a maximum of 16 speeds implemented by 16 state combinations of four DI terminals (set with functions 12 to 15) in Group C1. The multiple segments speed indicates percentages of the value of b0-13 (Maximum frequency).
If a DI terminal is used for the Multi-function function, you need to perform related setting in group b3. For details, refer to the descriptions of Group b3.
7: Simple PLC (built-in)
When the simple programmable logic controller (PLC) mode is used as the frequency source, the running frequency of the frequency inverter can be switched over among the 16 frequency references. You can set the holding time and acceleration/deceleration time of the 16 frequency references. For details, refer to the descriptions of Group C2.
8: PID
The output of PID control is used as the running frequency. PID control is generally used in on-site
9: Communication setting
The frequency is set by means of communication. closed-loop control, such as constant pressure closed-loop control and constant tension closed-loop control.
When applying PID as the frequency source, you need to set parameters of “PID function” in group C0.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
0: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, no-record after power off)
1: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, record after power b0-04
Auxiliary frequency source Y selection off)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
1
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7:Built-in PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
When used as an independent frequency input channel (frequency source switched over from X to Y), the auxiliary frequency source Y is used in the same way as the main frequency source X (refer to b0-03).
When the auxiliary frequency source is used for operation (frequency source is "X and Y operation"), pay attention to the following aspects:
1. If the auxiliary frequency source Y is digital setting, the preset frequency (b0-12) does not take effect.
You can directly adjust the set main frequency by pressing keys and on the operation panel (or using the UP/DOWN function of input terminals).
2. If the auxiliary frequency source is analog input (AI1, AI2 and AI3) or pulse setting, 100% of the input corresponds to the range of the auxiliary frequency Y (set in b0-05 and b0-06).
3. If the auxiliary frequency source is pulse setting, it is similar to analog input.
Note: The main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y must not use the same channel. That is, b0-03 and b0-04 cannot be set to the same value in case of confusion.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-05
Selection of auxiliary frequency
Y range
0: Relative to maximum frequency
1: Relative to main frequency X b0-06 Range of auxiliary frequency Y 0%~150%
0
100%
40
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
If X and Y operation is used, b0-05 and b0-06 are used to set the adjustment range of the auxiliary frequency source.
You can set the auxiliary frequency to be relative to either maximum frequency or main frequency X. If relative to main frequency X, the setting range of the auxiliary frequency Y varies according to the main frequency X.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Unit's digit: Frequency source selection.
0: Main frequency source X
1: X and Y calculation (calculation result determined by ten's digit)
2: Switchover between X and Y b0-07 Frequency source selection
3: Switchover between X and "X and Y calculation"
4: Switchover between Y and "X and Y calculation"
Ten's digit: X and Y calculation relationship
0: X+Y
1: X-Y
0
2: Maximum of them
3: Minimum of them
It is used to select the frequency setting channel. Frequency setting can be realized by the main frequency source X and auxiliary frequency source Y operation.
Diagram 5-1 Target frequency setting
If the frequency source involves X and Y operation, you can set the frequency offset in b0-08 for superposition to the X and Y operation result, flexibly satisfying various requirements.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-08
Frequency offset of auxiliary frequency source of X and Y
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13)
0.00 Hz
41
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is set to "X and Y operation". The final frequency is obtained by adding the frequency offset set in this parameter to the X and Y operation result.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Unit's digit: Binding keypad command to following frequency source.
0: No binding
1: Frequency source by digital setting b0-09
Binding command source to frequency source
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
0
9: Communication setting
Ten's digit: Binding terminal command to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
Hundred's digit: Binding communication command to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
Thousand’s digit: Automatically running binding to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
It is used to bind the three running command sources with the nine frequency sources, facilitating to implement synchronous switchover.
For details on the frequency sources, see the description of b0-03 (Main frequency source X selection).
Different running command sources can be bound to the same frequency source.
If a command source has bound to a frequency source, this frequency source set in b0-03~ b0-07 no longer takes effect when this command source is effective.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-10
Record of digital setting frequency of power failure
0: not record
1:record
This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is digital setting.
1
If b0-10 is set to 0, the digital setting frequency value restore to the value of b0-12 (Preset frequency) after the frequency inverter stops. The modification by using keys and or the terminal UP/DOWN function is cleared to zero.
If b0-10 is set to 1, the digital setting frequency value is the set frequency at the moment when the frequency inverter stops. The modification by using keys and or the terminal UP/ DOWN function remains is record and valid.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-11
Frequency unit
1: 0.1 Hz
2: 0.01 Hz
2
It is used to set the resolution of all frequency-related parameters.
If the resolution is 0.1 Hz, the EM11 can output up to 3000.0Hz. If the resolution is 0.01 Hz, the EM11 can output up to 300.00 Hz.
Note:
Modifying this parameter will make the decimal places of all frequency-related parameters change and
42
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes corresponding frequency values change display.
This parameter is not restored when factory fault setting is done.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-12
Preset frequency
0.00 ~ maximum frequency (b0-13)
50.00 Hz
If the frequency source is digital setting or terminal UP/DOWN, the value of this parameter is the initial frequency of the frequency inverter (digital setting).
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-13
Maximum frequency
50.00~3000.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
When the frequency source is AI, pulse setting (DI6), or Multi-segment speed, the 100% of input corresponds to the value of this parameter.
The output frequency of the EM11 can reach up to 3000 Hz. To take both frequency reference resolution and frequency input range into consideration, you can set the number of decimal places for frequency reference in b0-11.
If b0-11 is set to 1, the frequency reference resolution is 0.1 Hz. In this case, the setting range of b0-13 is
50.0 to 3000.0 Hz.
If b0-11 is set to 2, the frequency reference resolution is 0.01 Hz. In this case, the setting range of b0-13 is 50.00 to 300.00 Hz.
Note: After the value of b0-11 is modified, the frequency resolution of all frequency related function codes change accordingly.
Code
b0-14
Parameter Name
Source of frequency upper limit
Setting Range
0: Set by (b0-15)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
Default
0
It is used to set the source of the frequency upper limit, including digital setting (b0-15), AI, pulse setting or communication setting. If the frequency upper limit is set by means of AI1, AI2, AI3, DI5 or communication, the setting is similar to that of the main frequency source X. For details, see the description of b0-03.
For example, to avoid runaway in torque control mode in winding machine application, you can set the frequency upper limit by means of analog input. When the frequency inverter reaches the upper limit, it will run at this limited speed.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-15
Frequency upper limit
Frequency lower limit (b0-17)~maximum frequency (b0-13)
This parameter is used to set the frequency upper limit.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
50.00 Hz
Default
b0-16
Frequency upper limit offset
0.00 Hz~ maximum frequency(b0-13)
0.00 Hz
If the source of the frequency upper limit is analog input or pulse setting, the final frequency upper limit is obtained by adding the offset in this parameter to the frequency upper limit set in b0-14.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-17
Frequency lower limit
0.00 Hz ~frequency upper limit(b0-15)
0.00 Hz
If the frequency command is lower than the value of this parameter, the frequency inverter can stop, or run at the frequency lower limit, or run at zero speed. The result can be determined by b2-17(setting frequency lower than frequency lower limit running mode).
43
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-18
Rotation direction
0: Forward direction
1: Reverse direction
0
You can change the rotation direction of the motor just by modifying this parameter without changing the motor wiring. Modifying this parameter is equivalent to exchanging any two phase of the motor's U, V, W wires.
Note:
The motor will restore original running direction after parameter initialization (A0-09). Do not use this function in applications where changing the rotating direction of the motor is prohibited after system commissioning is complete.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-19
Base frequency for UP/
DOWN modification during
0: Running frequency
1: Setting frequency
0 running
This parameter is valid only when the frequency source is digital setting.
It is used to set the base frequency to be modified by using keys and or the terminal UP/DOWN function. If the running frequency and setting frequency are different, there will be a large difference between the frequency inverter's performance during the acceleration/ deceleration process.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-20
Acceleration/Deceleration mode
0: Linear acceleration/ deceleration
1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration B
0
It is used to set the frequency changing mode during the frequency inverter start and stop process.
0: Linear acceleration/deceleration
The output frequency increases or decreases in linear mode. The EM11 provides four groups of acceleration/deceleration time, which can be selected by using multi-function DI terminals (b3-00 to b3-11).
1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
The output frequency increases or decreases along the S curve. This mode is generally used in the applications where start and stop processes are required relatively smooth, such as elevator and conveyor belt. The b0-23 and b0-24 respectively define the time proportions of the start segment and the end segment.
2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration B
In this curve, the rated motor frequency fb is always the inflexion point of S curve. This mode is usually used in applications where acceleration/deceleration is required at the speed higher than the rated frequency.
44
Code
b0-21
Diagram 5-2 S-curve acceleration/deceleration B diagram
Parameter Name Setting Range
0.00s~650.00s (b0-25 = 2)
Acceleration time 1
0.0s~6500.0s (b0-25 = 1)
0s~65000s (b0-25 = 0)
Default
Model dependent
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-22
Deceleration time 1
0.00s~650.00s (b0-25 = 2)
0.0s~6500.0s (b0-25 = 1)
0s~65000s (b0-25 = 0)
Model dependent
Acceleration time indicates the time required by the frequency inverter to accelerate from 0 Hz to
"Acceleration / Deceleration base frequency" (b0-26), that is, t1 in Diagram 6-3. Including, f is setting frequency, fb is motor rated frequency, T is the acceleration time from 0 Hz to rated frequency fb.
Deceleration time indicates the time required by the frequency inverter to decelerate from "Acceleration /
Deceleration base frequency" (b0-26) to 0 Hz, that is, t2 in Diagram 6-3.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Diagram 5-3 Acceleration/Deceleration time
The EM11 provides totally four groups of acceleration/deceleration time for selection. You can perform switchover by using a DI terminal. And you can set the four groups of acceleration/deceleration time through the following function codes:
Group 1: b0-21, b0-22
Group 2: b2-03, b2-04
Group 3: b2-05, b2-06
Group 4: b2-07, b2-08
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-23
Time proportion of S-curve start segment
0.0% ~ (100.0% minus b0-24)
30.0% b0-24
Time proportion of S-curve end segment
0.0% ~ (100.0% minus b0-23)
30.0%
These two parameters respectively define the time proportions of the start segment and the end segment of
S-curve acceleration/deceleration A.
In Diagram 6-4, t1 is the time defined in b0-23, within which the slope of the output frequency change increases gradually. t2 is the time defined in b0-24, within which the slope of the output frequency change gradually decreases to 0. Within the time between t1 and t2, the slope of the output frequency change remains unchanged, that is, linear acceleration/ deceleration.
45
Code
Diagram 5-4 S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-25
Acceleration/Deceleration time unit
0:1s
1: 0.1s
1
2: 0.01s
To satisfy requirements of different applications, the EM11 provides three acceleration/ deceleration time units, 1s, 0.1s and 0.01s.
Note: Modifying this parameter will make the decimal places of all frequency-related parameters change and corresponding frequency values change. Pay attention for this in on-site application.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-26
Acceleration/Deceleration time base frequency
0: Maximum frequency (b0-13)
1: Set frequency
2: 100 Hz
0
The acceleration/deceleration time indicates the time for the frequency inverter to increase from 0 Hz to the frequency set in b0-26, figure 6-3 is the acceleration/deceleration time diagram. If this parameter is set to 1, the acceleration/deceleration time is related to the set frequency. If the set frequency changes frequently, the motor's acceleration/deceleration also changes.
5.2 Group b1: Start/Stop Control Parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-00
Start mode
0: Direct start
1: Rotational speed tracking restart
0
2: Pre-excited start (AC asynchronous motor)
0: Direct start
If the DC braking time is set to 0, the frequency inverter starts to run from the startup frequency.
If the DC braking time is not 0, the frequency inverter performs DC braking first and then starts to run from the startup frequency. It is applicable to small-inertia load application and to where the motor is likely to rotate at startup.
1: Rotational speed tracking restart
The frequency inverter judges the rotational speed and direction of the motor firstly, and then starts at the tracked frequency. Such smooth start has no impact on the rotating motor. It is applicable to the restart of instantaneous power failure of large-inertia loads. To ensure the perfect performance of rotational speed tracking restart, please set the motor parameters correctly.
2: Pre-excited start (asynchronous motor)
It is valid only for asynchronous motor and used for building the magnetic field before the motor runs.
For pre-excited current and pre-excited time, see parameters of b1-05 and b1-06.
If the pre-excited time is 0, the frequency inverter cancels pre-excitation and starts to run from startup
46
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes frequency.
If the pre-excited time is not 0, the frequency inverter pre-excites firstly before startup, improving the dynamic response of the motor.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-01
Rotational speed tracking mode
0: From frequency at stop
1: From zero speed
2: From maximum frequency
0
To complete the rotational speed tracking process within the shortest time, select the proper mode in which the frequency inverter tracks the motor rotational speed.
0: From frequency at stop
It is the commonly selected mode.
1: From zero frequency
It is applicable to restart after a long time of power failure.
2: From the maximum frequency
It is applicable to the power-generating load.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-02
Rotational speed tracking speed
1~100
20
In the rotational speed tracking restart mode, select the rotational speed tracking speed. The larger the value is, the faster the tracking is. However, too large value may cause unreliable tracking.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-03
Startup frequency
0.00~10.00 Hz
0.00 Hz b1-04
Startup frequency holding time
0.0s~100.0s
0.0s
To ensure the motor torque at frequency inverter startup, set a proper startup frequency. In addition, to build excitation when the motor starts up, the startup frequency must be held for a certain period.
The startup frequency (b1-03) is not restricted by the frequency lower limit. If the setting target frequency is lower than the startup frequency, the frequency inverter will not start and stays in the holding state.
During switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the startup frequency holding time is disabled. The holding time is not included in the acceleration time but in the running time of simple PLC.
Example 1: b0-03 = 0 The frequency source is digital setting. b0-12 = 2.00 Hz b1-03 = 5.00 Hz b1-04 = 2.0s
The digital setting frequency is 2.00 Hz.
The startup frequency is 5.00 Hz.
The startup frequency holding time is 2.0s.
In this example, the frequency inverter stays in the holding state and the output frequency is 0.00 Hz.
Example 2: b0-03 = 0 The frequency source is digital setting. b0-12 = 10.00 Hz The digital setting frequency is 10.00 Hz. b1-03 = 5.00 Hz The startup frequency is 5.00 Hz. b1-04 = 2.0s The startup frequency holding time is 2.0s.
In this example, the frequency inverter accelerates to 5.00 Hz at 2s, and then accelerates to the set frequency
10.00 Hz.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-05 b1-06
Startup DC braking current/
Pre-excited current
Startup DC braking time/
Pre-excited time
0%~100%
0.0s~100.0s
0%
0.0s
47
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Startup DC braking is generally used during restart of the frequency inverter after the rotating motor stops.
Pre-excitation is used to make the frequency inverter build magnetic field for the asynchronous motor before startup to improve the responsiveness.
Startup DC braking is valid only for direct start (b1-00 = 0). In this case, the frequency inverter performs
DC braking at the setting startup DC braking current. After the startup DC braking time, the frequency inverter starts to run. If the startup DC braking time is 0, the frequency inverter starts directly without DC braking. The larger the startup DC braking current is, the larger the braking force is.
If the startup mode is pre-excited start (b1-00 = 3), the frequency inverter firstly builds magnetic field based on the set pre-excited current. After the pre-excited time, the frequency inverter starts to run. If the pre-excited time is 0, the frequency inverter starts directly without pre-excitation.
The startup DC braking current or pre-excited current is a percentage of motor rated current.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-07
Stop mode
0: Decelerate to stop
1: free stop
0
0: Decelerate to stop
After the stop command is enabled, the frequency inverter decreases the output frequency according to the deceleration time and stops when the frequency decreases to zero.
1: Free stop
After the stop command is enabled, the frequency inverter immediately stops the output. The motor will free stop based on the mechanical inertia.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b1-08 b1-09
DC braking initial frequency of stopping
DC braking waiting time of stopping
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
0.0s~100.0s
0.00 Hz
0.0s b1-10
DC braking current of stopping
0%~100%
0% b1-11
DC braking time of stopping
0.0s~100.0s
0.0s
b1-08 (Initial frequency of stop DC braking)
During the process of decelerating to stop, the frequency inverter starts DC braking when the running frequency is lower than the value set in b1-08.
b1-09 (Waiting time of stop DC braking)
When the running frequency decreases to the initial frequency of stop DC braking, the frequency inverter stops output for a certain period and then starts DC braking. This prevents faults such as over current caused due to DC braking at high speed.
b1-10 (Stop DC braking current)
This parameter specifies the output current at DC braking and is a percentage relative to the motor rated current. The larger the value is, the stronger the DC braking effects, but the more heat the motor and frequency inverter emit.
b1-11 (Stop DC braking time)
This parameter specifies the holding time of DC braking. If it is set to 0, DC braking is cancelled. The stop
DC braking process is shown in the following figure.
48
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes 5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b2-09
Parameter Name
Jump frequency 1
Setting Range
0.00 Hz ~maximum frequency
Default
0.00 Hz b2-10
Jump frequency 2
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
0.00 Hz b2-11
Frequency jump amplitude
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
0.00Hz
If the setting frequency is within the jump frequency range, the actual running frequency is the jump frequency close to the set frequency. Setting the jump frequency helps to avoid the mechanical resonance point of the load.
The EM11 supports two jump frequencies. If both are set to 0, the frequency jump function is disabled. The principle of the jump frequencies and jump amplitude is shown in the following figure 6-6.
Diagram 5-5 Stop DC braking process
5.3 Group b2: Auxiliary Functions
Code
b2-00
Parameter Name
JOG running frequency
Setting Range
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
Default
6.00 Hz b2-01
JOG acceleration time
0.0s~6500.0s
Model dependent b2-02
JOG deceleration time
0.0s~6500.0s
Model dependent
These parameters are used to define the set frequency and acceleration/deceleration time of the frequency inverter when jogging. The startup mode is fixed as "Direct start" (b1-00 = 0) and the stop mode is fixed as
"Decelerate to stop" (b1-07 = 0) during jogging.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-03 b2-04 b2-05
Acceleration time 2
Deceleration time 2
Acceleration time 3
0.0s~6500.0s
0.0s~6500.0s
0.0s~6500.0s
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent b2-06 b2-07
Deceleration time 3
Acceleration time 4
0.0s~6500.0s
0.0s~6500.0s
Model dependent
Model dependent b2-08
Deceleration time 4
0.0s~6500.0s
Model dependent
The EM11 provides a total of four groups of acceleration/deceleration time, that is, the above three groups and the group b0-21 and b0-22. Definitions of four groups are completely the same, for more details, see the description of b0-21 and b0-22. You can switch over between the four groups of acceleration/deceleration time through different state combinations of DI terminals. For more details, see the descriptions of b3-01 to b3-011.
49
Diagram 5-6 Principle of the jump frequencies and jump amplitude
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-12
Jump frequency during acceleration/ deceleration
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
It is used to set whether the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration/deceleration.
0.00Hz
When the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration/deceleration, and the running frequency is within the frequency jump range, the actual running frequency will jump over the set frequency jump amplitude
(rise directly from the lowest jump frequency to the highest jump frequency). The following figure shows the diagram when the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration/deceleration.
50
Diagram 5-7 Diagrams when the jump frequencies are valid during acceleration/deceleration
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code
b2-13
Parameter Name
Frequency switchover point between acceleration time 1 and acceleration time 2
Setting Range
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
Default
0.00 Hz b2-14
Frequency switchover point between deceleration time 1
0.00 ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz and deceleration time 2
This function is valid when motor 1 is selected and acceleration/deceleration time switchover is not performed by means of DI terminal. It is used to select different groups of acceleration/ deceleration time based on the running frequency range rather than DI terminal during the running process of the frequency inverter.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
Diagram 5-9 Forward/Reverse rotation dead-zone time
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-17
Running mode when set frequency lower than
0: Run at frequency lower limit
1: Stop 0 frequency lower limit
2: Run at zero speed
It is used to set the frequency inverter running mode when the set frequency is lower than the frequency lower limit. The EM11 provides three running modes to satisfy requirements of various applications.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-18
Droop control
0.00Hz~10.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
Diagram 5-8 Acceleration/deceleration time switchover
This function is used for balancing the workload allocation when multiple motors are used to drive the same load. The output frequency of the frequency inverters decreases as the load increases. You can reduce the workload of the motor under load by decreasing the output frequency for this motor, implementing workload balancing among multiple motors.
During acceleration, if the running frequency is smaller than the value of b2-13, acceleration time 1 is selected. If the running frequency is larger than the value of b2-13, acceleration time 2 is selected.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
During deceleration, if the running frequency is larger than the value of b2-14, deceleration time 1 is selected. If the running frequency is smaller than the value of b2-14, deceleration time 2 is selected. b2-19
Terminal JOG priority
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
It is used to set whether terminal JOG is priority.
Code Parameter Name
running
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
Setting Range Default
0
It is used to set the time when the output is 0 Hz at transition of the frequency inverter forward rotation and reverse rotation, as shown in the following figure.
If terminal JOG is priority, the frequency inverter switches to terminal JOG running state when there is a terminal JOG command during the running process of the frequency inverter.
It is used to set whether the frequency inverter allows reverse rotation. In the applications where reverse rotation is prohibited, set this parameter to 1.
Code
b2-16
Parameter Name
Forward/Reverse rotation dead-zone time
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-20
Setting power-on time reach threshold
0~65000 h 0 h
Setting Range Default
If the accumulative power-on time (b9-08) reaches the value set in this parameter, the corresponding DO
0.0~3000.0s 0.0s terminal output ON signal.
For example, combining virtual DI/DO functions, to implement the function that the frequency inverter reports an alarm when the actual accumulative power-on time reaches the threshold of 100 hours, perform the setting as follows:
1. Set virtual DI1 to user-defined fault 1: b7-00 = 40.
2. Set that the valid state of virtual DI1 is from virtual DO1: b7-05 = 0000.
3. Set virtual DO1 to power-on time reached: b7-11= 25.
4. Set the accumulative power-on time reach threshold to 100 h: b2-20 = 100 h.
Then, the frequency inverter alarm output Err27 when the accumulative power-on time reaches 100 hours.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-21
Setting running time reach threshold
0~65000 h 0 h
51 52
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
It is used to set the accumulative running time threshold of the Frequency inverter. If the accumulative running time (b9-09) reaches the value set in this parameter, the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-22
Action after running time reached
0: Continue to run
1: Stop
0
This function is used to define the action after b2-21 preset time reached. Setting 0 inverter will continue work after present running time reached; and set 1, the inverter will stop.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
control
0: Fan working during running
1: Fan working during power on
0
It is used to set the working mode of the cooling fan. If this parameter is set to 0, the fan works when the frequency inverter is in running state. When the frequency inverter stops, the cooling fan works if the heatsink temperature is higher than 40°C, and stops working if the heatsink temperature is lower than 40°C.
If this parameter is set to 1, the cooling fan keeps working after power-on.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-24 Dormant frequency 0.00Hz ~wakeup frequency (b2-26) 0.00 Hz b2-25
Dormant delay time
0.0s~6000.0s frequency
Dormant frequency (b2-24)~ maximum frequency (b0-13)
0.0s
0.00 Hz b2-27
Wakeup delay time
0.0s~6000.0s
0.0s
These parameters are used to implement the dormant and wakeup functions in the water supply application.
When the frequency inverter is in running state, the frequency inverter enters the dormant state and stops automatically after the dormant delay time (b2-25) if the set frequency is lower than or equal to the dormant frequency (b2-24).
When the frequency inverter is in dormant state and the present running command is effective, the frequency inverters starts up after the wakeup delay time (b2-27) if the set frequency is higher than or equal to the wakeup frequency (b2-26).
Generally, set the wakeup frequency should be equal to or higher than the dormant frequency. If the wakeup frequency and dormant frequency are set to 0, the dormant and wakeup functions are disabled.
When the dormant function is enabled, if the frequency source is PID, whether PID operation is performed in the dormant state is determined by C0-27. In this case, select PID operation enabled in the stop state
(C0-27 = 1).
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
function
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 b2-29 Timing duration source
0: b2-30
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
(100% of analog input corresponds to the value of b2-30)
0 b2-30
Timing duration
0.0min~6500.0 min
0.0 min
These parameters are used to implement the frequency inverter timing function.
If b2-28 is set to 1, the frequency inverter starts to time at startup. When the set timing duration reached, the frequency inverter stops automatically, and meanwhile the corresponding DO outputs ON signal.
The frequency inverter starts timing from 0.0min each time it starts up and the remaining timing duration can be checked by U0-20.
The timing duration is set in b2-29 and b2-30, in unit of minute.
53
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b2-31
This time running time
0.0min~6500.0 min 0.0 min reached threshold
If the present running time reaches the value set in this parameter, the corresponding DO outputs ON signal, indicating that present running time is reached.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
protection
0: No
1: Yes
0
This parameter is used to enable the frequency inverter safety protection. If it is set to 1, the frequency inverter does not respond to the run command after power-on (for example, an input terminal is ON before power-on). The frequency inverter responds only after the run command is cancelled and becomes valid again.
In addition, the frequency inverter does not respond to the run command valid from fault reset of the frequency inverter. The run protection can be disabled only after the run command is cancelled one time.
In this way, the motor will not automatically startup to avoid unexpected dangerous conditions for these startup commands from power-on and fault reset.
5.4 Group b3: Input Terminals
The EM11 provides six digital input (DI) terminals (DI6 can be used for high-speed pulse input) and two analog input (AI) terminals. The optional extension card provides another six DI terminals (DI7 to DI12) and one AI terminal (AI3).
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b3-00 DI1 function selection 1: Forward RUN (FWD) Standard b3-01 b3-02
DI2 function selection
DI3 function selection
4: Forward JOG (FJOG)
9: Multi-function terminal 4
Standard
Standard b3-03 b3-04 b3-05 b3-06 b3-07 b3-08 b3-09 b3-10
DI4 function selection
DI5 function selection
12: clear to zero of UP and DOWN setting
(terminal, keypad)
13: Terminal 1 for acceleration/ deceleration time selection
DI6/HDI function selection 32: Pulse input (enabled only for HDI)
DI7 function selection
DI8 function selection
DI9 function selection
DI10 function selection
DI11 function selection
0
0
0
0
0
Standard
Standard
Standard
Extended
Extended
Extended
Extended
Extended b3-11 DI12 function selection 0 Extended
The following table lists the functions available for the DI terminals.
Value Function
0 No function
1
Table 6-1 Functions of DI terminals
Description
Set 0 for reserved terminals to avoid malfunction.
Forward RUN (FWD) or running command
The terminal is used to control forward or reverse running of the
2 direction of FED/REV
4 Forward JOG (FJOG)
The terminal determines three-line control of the frequency inverter. For details, see the description of b3-13.
FJOG indicates forward JOG running, while RJOG indicates reverse JOG running. The JOG frequency, acceleration time and deceleration time are described respectively in b2-00, b2-01 and b2-02.
54
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Value Function
6 Multi-function terminal 1
7 Multi-function terminal 2
8 Multi-function terminal 3
9 Multi-function terminal 4
The setting of 16 speeds or 16 other references can be implemented through combinations of 16 states of these four terminals.
Description
10 Terminal UP
12
If the frequency is determined by external terminals, the terminals with the two functions are used as increment and decrement commands for frequency modification.
When the frequency source is digital setting, they are used to adjust the frequency.
If the frequency source is digital setting, the terminal is used to
UP and DOWN setting clear clear the modification by using the UP/ DOWN function or the
(terminal, operation panel) increment/decrement key on the operation panel, returning the set frequency to the value of b0-12.
13 deceleration time selection
14 deceleration time selection
15 Frequency source switchover terminals.
The terminal is used to perform switchover between two frequency sources according to the setting in b0-07.
16
17 frequency source X and preset frequency
After this terminal becomes ON, the frequency source X is replaced by the preset frequency (b0-12).
Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
After this terminal is enabled, the frequency source Y is replaced by the preset frequency (b0-12).
If the command source is set to terminal control (b0-02
18 source switchover terminal control and operation panel control.
If the command source is set to communication control (b0-02 =
2), this terminal is used to perform switchover between communication control and operation panel control.
19 source switchover control, the system will switch over to communication control after this terminal becomes ON.
This terminal enables the frequency inverter to switch over
20 switchover
24 Reverse PID action direction
25 PID parameter switchover becomes OFF, the frequency inverter runs in the mode set in d1-00. When this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter switches over to the other control mode.
The Frequency inverter is prohibited from torque control and enters the speed control mode.
PID is invalid temporarily. The frequency inverter maintains the present frequency output without supporting PID adjustment of frequency source.
After this terminal becomes ON, the integral adjustment function pauses. However, the proportional and differentiation adjustment functions are still valid.
After this terminal becomes ON, the PID action direction is reversed to the direction set in C0-04.
If the PID parameters switchover performed by means of DI terminal (C0-12 = 1). When the terminal becomes OFF; the PID parameters are C0-06~C0-08; when this terminal becomes ON, the PID parameters switch to C0-09 ~ C0-11.
55
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Value Function
26 PLC status reset
28 Counter input
29 Counter reset
30 Length count input
31 Length reset
Description
The terminal is used to restore the original status of PLC control for the frequency inverter when PLC control is started again after a pause.
The frequency inverter outputs the central frequency, and the swing frequency function pauses.
This terminal is used to count pulses.
This terminal is used to clear the counter status.
This terminal is used to count the length.
This terminal is used to clear the length.
32
33
34
Pulse input (enabled only for
DI6/HDI)
DI6 is used for pulse input.
Frequency modification forbidden
After this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter does not respond to any frequency modification.
Acceleration/Deceleration prohibited
35 Motor selection terminal 1
It enables the frequency inverter to maintain the present frequency output without being affected by external signals
(except the STOP command).
Switchover among the two groups of motor parameters can be implemented through this terminal.
36
(Reserved)
37 Fault reset (RESET)
38
39
The terminal is used for fault reset function, the same as the function of RESET key on the operation panel. Remote fault reset is implemented by this function.
Normally open (NO) input of external fault
If this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter reports
Err15 and performs the fault protection action. For more details, see the description of bb-32.
Normally closed (NC) input of
After this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter reports external fault
Err15 and performs the fault protection action. For more details, see the description of bb-32.
40 User-defined fault 1 If these two terminals become ON, the frequency inverter reports Err27 and Err28 respectively, and performs fault protection actions based on the setting in bb-34.
45 External STOP terminal 1
46 External STOP terminal 2
The frequency inverter decelerates to stop, but the running parameters are all memorized, such as PLC, swing frequency and PID parameters. After this function is disabled, the frequency inverter restore to its status before stop.
The frequency inverter blocks its output, the motor free stop and is not controlled by the frequency inverter. It is the same as free stop described in b1-07.
When this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter stops within the shortest time. During the stop process, the current remains at the set current upper limit. This function is used to satisfy the requirement of stopping the frequency inverter in emergency state.
In operation keypad mode, this terminal can be used to stop the frequency inverter, equivalent to the function of the STOP key on the operation keypad.
In any control mode (operation panel, terminal or communication), it can be used to make the frequency inverter decelerate to stop. In this case, the deceleration time is deceleration time 4.
When this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter decelerates to the initial frequency of DC braking and then switches over to DC braking state.
56
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Value Function
48 Immediate DC braking
Description
After this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter directly switches over to the DC braking state.
49 Clear this time running time
When this terminal becomes ON, the frequency inverter's this time running time is cleared. This function must be supported by b2-28 and b2-31.
The four multi-function terminals have 16 state combinations, corresponding to 16 reference values, as listed in the following table.
Reference Setting K4 K3 K2
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF OFF
OFF OFF ON
K1
OFF
ON
OFF
Reference 1
Reference 2
Reference 3
Corresponding Parameter
C1-00
C1-01
C1-02
OFF OFF ON
OFF ON OFF
OFF
OFF
ON OFF
ON ON
OFF ON ON
ON OFF OFF
ON OFF OFF
ON OFF ON
ON OFF ON
ON ON OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Reference 5
Reference 6
Reference 7
Reference 8
Reference 9
Reference 10
Reference 11
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
C1-09
C1-10
C1-11
C1-12
ON
ON
ON OFF
ON ON
ON
OFF
Reference 13
Reference 14
C1-13
C1-14
ON ON ON ON Reference 15 C1-15
If the frequency source is multi-function, the value 100% of C1-00~ C1-15 corresponds to the value of b0-13
(Maximum frequency).
Besides as the multi-speed function, the multi-function can be also used as the PID setting source or the voltage source for V/F separation, satisfying the requirement on switchover of different setting values.
Table 5-2 Function description of Acceleration/Deceleration time selection terminals
Terminal 2 Terminal 1
OFF OFF
Acceleration/Deceleration Time Corresponding
b0-21, b0-22
Acceleration/Deceleration time 2 OFF ON
ON OFF
ON ON Acceleration/Deceleration time 4 b2-03, b2-04 b2-05, b2-06 b2-07, b2-08
Terminal 1
Table 5-3 Function description of motor selection terminals
Selected Motor Corresponding Parameters
OFF Motor 1 Group d0, Group d1, Group d2
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
0.010s
It is used to set the software filter time of DI terminal status. If DI terminals are liable to interference and may cause malfunction, increase the value of this parameter to enhance the anti-interference capability.
However, increase of DI filter time will slow down the response of DI terminals.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b3-13 Terminal command mode
0: Two-line mode 1
1: Two-line mode 2
2: Three-line mode 1
3: Three-line mode 2
0
57
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
This parameter is used to set the mode in which the frequency inverter is controlled by external terminals.
The following uses DI1, DI2 and DI3 among DI1 to DI12 as an example, with allocating functions of DI1,
DI2 and DI3 by setting b3-00 to b3-02.
0: Two-line mode 1
It is the most commonly used two-line mode, in which the forward/reverse rotation of the motor is decided by DI1 and DI2. The parameters are set as below:
Code Name Value Function Description
b3-13 Terminal command mode 0 Two-line 1 b3-00 b3-01
DI1 function selection
DI2 function selection
1
2
Forward RUN (FWD)
Reverse RUN (REV)
Diagram 5-10 Setting of two-line mode 1
As shown in the preceding figure, when only K1 is ON, the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation.
When only K2 is ON, the frequency inverter instructs reverse rotation. When K1 and K2 are ON or OFF simultaneous, the frequency inverter stops.
1: Two-line mode 2
In this mode, DI1 is RUN enabled terminal, and DI2 determines the running direction. The parameters are set as below:
Code Name Value Function Description
b3-13 Terminal command mode 1 Two-line 2 b3-00 DI1 1 RUN b3-01 DI2 function selection 2 Forward or reverse
Diagram 5-11 Setting of two-line mode 2
As shown in the preceding figure, if K1 is ON, the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation when K2 is
OFF, and instructs reverse rotation when K2 is ON. If K1 is OFF, the Frequency inverter stops.
2: Three-line mode 1
In this mode, DI3 is RUN enabled terminal, and the direction is decided by DI1 and DI2. The parameters are set as below:
58
Code
b3-13 b3-00 b3-01 b3-02
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Name
Terminal command mode
DI1 function selection
DI2 function selection
DI3 function selection
Value Function Description
2 Three-line 1
1
2
3
Forward RUN (FWD)
Reverse RUN (REV)
Three-line control
Diagram 5-12 Setting of three-line mode 1
As shown in the preceding figure, if SB1 is ON, the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation when Sb2 is pressed to be ON, and instructs reverse rotation when SB3 is pressed to be ON. The frequency inverter stops immediately after SB1 becomes OFF. During normal startup and running, SB1 must remain ON. The frequency inverter's running state is determined by the final actions on SB1, SB2 and SB3.
3: Three-line mode 2
In this mode, DI3 is RUN enabled terminal. The RUN command is given by DI1 and the direction is decided by DI2. The parameters are set as below:
Code Name Value Function Description
Three-line 2 b3-13 Terminal command mode 3 b3-00 DI1 selection b3-01 b3-02
DI2 function selection
DI3 function selection
2
3
Forward or reverse
Three-line control
Diagram 5-13 Setting of three-line mode 2
As shown in the preceding figure, if SB1 is ON, the frequency inverter starts running when SB2 is pressed to be ON; the frequency inverter instructs forward rotation when K is OFF and instructs reverse rotation when
K is ON. The Frequency inverter stops immediately after SB1 becomes OFF. During normal startup and running, SB1 must remain ON,SB2 is effective immediately after ON action.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b3-14 Terminal UP/DOWN rate 0.001Hz/s~65.535 Hz/s 0.100 Hz/s
It is used to adjust the ratio of changing of frequency for per second when the frequency is adjusted by means of terminal UP/ DOWN.
59
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
1. If b0-11 (Frequency reference resolution) is 2, the setting range is 0.001Hz/s~65.535 Hz/s.
2. If b0-11 (Frequency reference resolution) is 1, the setting range is 0.01Hz/s~655.35 Hz/s.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
b3-15
DI1 ON delay time
0.0s~3000.0s b3-16 b3-17 b3-18 b3-19 b3-20
DI1 OFF delay time
DI2 ON delay time
DI2 OFF delay time
DI3 ON delay time
DI3 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s~3000.0s
Default
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s b3-21 b3-22
DI4 ON delay time
DI4 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
0.0s b3-23
DI5 ON delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s b3-24
DI5 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
These parameters are used to set the delay time of the frequency inverter when the status of DI terminals changes.
The DI1 to DI5 support the delay time function.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Unit's digit: DI1 valid mode.
0: Low level valid b3-25 DI valid selection 1
1: High level valid
Ten's digit: DI2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Hundred's digit: DI3 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
00000 b3-26 DI valid selection 2
Thousand's digit: DI4 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten thousand's digit: DI5 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Unit's digit: DI6 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten's digit: DI7 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Hundred's digit: DI8 state.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
00000
Thousand's digit: DI9 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten thousand's digit: DI10 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
These parameters are used to set the valid mode of DI terminals.
0: Low level valid
The DI terminal is invalid when being connected with COM, and valid when being disconnected from COM.
1: High level valid
The DI terminal is valid when being connected with COM, and invalid when being disconnected from COM.
5.5 Group b4: Output Terminals
The EM11 provides an analog output (AO) terminal, a digital output (DO) terminal, a relay terminal and a
60
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
FM terminal (used for high-speed pulse output or open-collector switch signal output) as standard. If these output terminals cannot satisfy requirements, use an optional I/O extension card.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-00 FM terminal output mode
0: Pulse output (FMP)
1: Switch signal output (FMR)
1
The FM terminal is programmable multiplexing terminal. It can be used for high-speed pulse output (FMP), with maximum frequency of 100 kHz. Refer to b6-00 for relevant functions of FMP. It can also be used as open collector switch signal output (FMR).
Code Parameter Name Default
b4-01 FMR function (open- collector output terminal) 0 b4-02 Relay 1 function (TA-TB-TC) b4-03 Reserved b4-04 DO1 function selection (open-collector output terminal)
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
These nine parameters are used to select the functions of the nine digital output terminals. TA-TB-TC and
P/A-P/B-P/C are respectively the relays on the control board and the extension card.
The functions of the output terminals are described in the following table.
Value Function Description
0 No output The terminal has no function.
1 Ready for RUN
If the frequency inverter main circuit and control circuit become stable, and the frequency inverter detects no fault and is ready for
RUN, the terminal becomes ON.
2
3
Frequency inverter running
Fault output (free stop)
When the frequency inverter is running and has output frequency (can be zero), the terminal becomes ON.
When the frequency inverter stops due to a fault, the terminal becomes
ON.
4
Fault output(free stop fault, no output at under-voltage)
5 Swing frequency limited
If the set frequency exceeds the frequency upper limit or lower limit and the output frequency of the frequency inverter reaches the upper limit or lower limit, the terminal becomes ON.
In speed control mode, if the output torque reaches the torque limit,
7
8
9
Frequency upper limit reached
Frequency lower limit reached (no output at the terminal becomes ON.
If the running frequency reaches the upper limit, the terminal becomes
ON.
If the running frequency reaches the lower limit, the terminal becomes
ON. In the stop state, the terminal becomes OFF. reached (having output at stop)
If the running frequency reaches the lower limit, the terminal becomes
ON. In the stop state, the signal is still ON.
61
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Value
11
12
13
14
Function
Zero-speed running (no output at stop)
Zero-speed running 2
(having output at stop)
Set count value reached
Designated count value reached
Description
If the frequency inverter runs with the output frequency of 0, the terminal becomes ON. If the frequency inverter is in the stop state, the terminal becomes OFF.
If the output frequency of the frequency inverter is 0, the terminal becomes ON. In the state of stop, the signal is still ON.
The terminal becomes ON when the count value reaches the value set in C3-08.
The terminal becomes ON when the count value reaches the value set in C3-09.
19
20
21
22
23
16 PLC complete
17
Frequency-level detection
FDT1 output
Refer to the descriptions of b4-22 and b4-23.
18
24
Frequency level detection
FDT2 output
Refer to the descriptions of b4-24 and b4-25.
Frequency reached Refer to the descriptions of b4-26.
Frequency 1 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4-27 and b4-28.
Frequency 2 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4-29 and b4-30.
Current 1 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4-35 and b4-36.
Current 2 reached Refer to the descriptions of b4-37 and b4-38.
Module temperature reached
If the heatsink temperature of the inverter module (b9-07) reaches the set module temperature threshold (b4-39), the terminal becomes ON.
62
26
27
28
29
Zero current state Refer to the descriptions of b4-24 and b4-25.
Output current limit exceeded
Refer to the descriptions of b4-33 and b4-34.
Lower voltage state output
If the frequency inverter is in lower voltage state, the terminal becomes ON.
Frequency inverter overload pre-warning
The frequency inverter judges whether the motor load exceeds the overload pre-warning threshold before performing the protection action. If the pre-warning threshold is exceeded, the terminal becomes
ON. For motor overload parameters, see the descriptions of bb-01 to bb-03.
30
31
32
33
Motor overheat warning
Motor overload pre-warning
Off load
AI1 larger than AI2
If the motor temperature reaches the temperature set in bb-27 (Motor overheat warning threshold), the terminal becomes ON. You can view the motor temperature by using U0-33.
The frequency inverter judges motor overload according to preset motor overload threshold, and terminal becomes ON. The overload threshold setting refer to bb-01~bb-03.
If the load becomes 0, the terminal becomes ON.
When the input of AI1 is larger than the input of AI2, the terminal becomes ON.
34 AI1 input limit exceeded
If AI1 input is larger than the value of b5-06 (AI1 input voltage upper limit) or lower than the value of b5-05 (AI1 input voltage lower limit), the terminal becomes ON.
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Value
35
36
37
38
Function
Alarm output (all faults)
This time running time reached
Description
If a fault occurs on the frequency inverter and the frequency inverter continues to run, the terminal outputs the alarm signal.
If the current running time of frequency inverter exceeds the value of b2-31, the terminal becomes ON.
Accumulative power- on time reached
If the frequency inverter accumulative power-on time (b9-08) exceeds the value set in b2-20, the terminal becomes ON.
Accumulative running time reached
If the accumulative running time of the frequency inverter exceeds the time set in b2-21, the terminal becomes ON.
Code
b4-10 b4-11 b4-12 b4-13 b4-14
Parameter Name
FMR ON delay time
FMR OFF delay time
Relay 1 ON delay time
Relay 1 OFF delay time
Setting Range
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s~3000.0s
Reserved
Reserved
Default
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s b4-15
0.0s b4-17
DO1 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
0.0s b4-19
DO2 OFF delay time
0.0s~3000.0s
0.0s
These parameters are used to set the delay time of output terminals FMR, relay, DO1, DO2 and DO3 from status change to actual output.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Unit's digit: FMR valid mode.
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Ten's digit: Relay 1 valid mode. b4-20 DO logic selection 1
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Hundred's digit: Relay 2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Thousand's digit: DO1 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Ten thousand's digit: DO2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
00000
It is used to set the logic of output terminals FMR, relay, DO1 and DO2.
0: Positive logic
The output terminal is valid when being connected with COM, and invalid when being disconnected from
COM.
1: Positive logic
The output terminal is invalid when being connected with COM, and valid when being disconnected from
COM.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b4-22
Frequency detection value
(FDT1)
0.00 Hz~ maximum frequency 50.00 Hz b4-23
Frequency detection hysteresis
(FDT hysteresis 1)
0.0%~100.0% (FDT1 level) 5.0%
If the running frequency is higher than the value of b4-22, the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON. If
63
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual the running frequency is lower than value of b4-22, the DO terminal goes OFF.
These two parameters are respectively used to set the detection value of output frequency and hysteresis value of cancellation of the output. The value of b4-23 is a percentage of the hysteresis frequency to the frequency detection value (b4-22). The FDT function is shown in the following figure.
Code
b4-24 b4-25
Parameter Name
Frequency detection value
(FDT2)
Diagram 5-14 FDT level
Setting Range
0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency
Frequency detection hysteresis
(FDT hysteresis 2)
0.0%~100.0% (FDT2 level)
Default
50.00 Hz
5.0%
The frequency detection function is the same as FDT1 function. For details, refer to the descriptions of b4-22 and b4-23.
Code
b4-26
Parameter Name
Detection amplitude of frequency reached
Setting Range
0.00~100% (maximum frequency)
Default
3.0%
If the frequency inverter running frequency is within the certain range of the set frequency, the corresponding DO terminal becomes ON.
This parameter is used to set the range within which the output frequency is detected to reach the set frequency. The value of this parameter is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency. The detection range of frequency reached is shown in the following figure.
64
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes 5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b4-27
Diagram 5-15 Detection range of frequency reached
Parameter Name
Any frequency reaching detection value 1
Setting Range
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
Default
50.00 Hz b4-28 b4-29 b4-30
Any frequency reaching detection amplitude 1
Any frequency reaching detection value 2
Any frequency reaching detection amplitude 2
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency)
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency)
3.0%
50.00 Hz
3.0%
If the output frequency of the frequency inverter is within the positive and negative amplitudes of the any frequency reaching detection value, the corresponding DO becomes ON.
The EM11 provides two groups of any frequency reaching detection parameters, including frequency detection value and detection amplitude, as shown in the following figure.
Code
b4-31 b4-32
Diagram 5-16 Any frequency reaching detection
Parameter Name Setting Range
Zero current detection level 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current)
Zero current detection delay time
Default
5.0%
0.00s~600.00s 0.10s
If the output current of the frequency inverter is equal to or less than the zero current detection level and the duration exceeds the zero current detection delay time, the corresponding DO becomes ON. The zero current detection is shown in the following figure.
65
Code
Diagram 5-17 Zero current detection
Parameter Name Setting Range
b4-33 Over current output threshold 0.0%~300.0% (rated motor current) b4-34
Over current output detection delay time
Default
200.0%
0.00s~600.00s 0.10s
If the output current of the frequency inverter is equal to or higher than the over current threshold and the duration exceeds the detection delay time, the corresponding DO becomes ON. The output over current detection function is shown in the following figure.
66
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code
b4-35 b4-36 b4-37 b4-38
Diagram 5-18 Output over current detection
Parameter Name Setting Range
Any current reaching 1 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) amplitude of any current reaching 1
Any current reaching 2
Amplitude of any current reaching 2
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current)
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current)
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current)
Default
100.0%
3.0%
100.0%
3.0%
If the output current of the frequency inverter is within the positive and negative amplitudes of any current reaching detection value, the corresponding DO becomes ON.
The EM11 provides two groups of any current reaching detection parameters, including current detection value and detection amplitudes, as shown in the following figure.
Diagram 5-19 Any current reaching detection
Parameter Name Setting Range Code Default
75°C
When the heatsink temperature of the frequency inverter reaches the value of this parameter, the corresponding DO becomes ON, indicating that the IGBT module temperature reaches the threshold.
67
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
5.6 Group b5: Pulse/Analog input terminals
Code
b5-00 b5-01 b5-02 b5-03
Parameter Name Setting Range
Pulse minimum input(HDI) 0.00 kHz ~b5-02
Corresponding setting of pulse minimum input
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-00 ~ 50.00 kHz Pulse maximum input
Corresponding setting of pulse maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0%
Default
0.00 kHz
0.00%
50.00 kHz
100.0%
10.00s
Can only be input by DI6. The method of setting this function is similar to that of setting AI1 function..
Diagram 5-20 The relationship between pulse input and setting value
Code
b5-05
Parameter Name
AI1 input voltage lower limit of protection
0.00 V~ b5-06
Setting Range Default
3.10 V b5-06
AI1 input voltage upper limit of protection b5-05~10.00 V 6.80 V
These two parameters are used to set the limits of the input voltage to provide protection on the frequency inverter. When the AI1 input is larger than the value of b5-06 or smaller than the value of b5-05, the corresponding DO becomes ON, indicating that AI1 input exceeds the limit. Every analog input has five setting points to facilitate the setting of the AI curve.
Code
b5-07
Parameter Name
AI1input minimum value 0.00 V ~ b5-15
Setting Range Default
0.00 V b5-08
Corresponding setting of AI1 minimum input
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-09
Second point input value of
AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V b5-10
Corresponding setting of second point input value of
-100.0% ~100.0%
AI1 b5-11
Third point input value of AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V b5-12 b5-13
Corresponding setting of third point input value of AI1
Fourth point input value of
AI1
-100.0% ~100.0%
0.00 V~10.00 V b5-14
Corresponding setting of
-100.0% ~100.0%
0.0%
2.50V
25.0%
5.00V
50.0%
7.50V
75.0%
68
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code
b5-15
Parameter Name
fourth point input value of AI1
AI1 input maximum value
Setting Range
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
Default
10.00 V b5-16
Corresponding setting of AI1 maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0%
100.0% b5-17
AI1input filter time
0.00s~10.00s
0.10s
These parameters are used to define the relationship between the analog input voltage and the corresponding setting value.
When the analog input is current input, 1 mA current corresponds to 0.5 Volts.
Diagram 5-21 Corresponding relationship between analog input and setting values b5-17 (AI1 filter time) is used to set the software filter time of AI1. If the analog input is liable to interference, increase the value of this parameter to stabilize the detected analog input. However, increase of the AI filter time will slow down the response of analog detection. Set this parameter properly based on actual conditions.
In different applications, 100% of analog input corresponds to different nominal values. For details, refer to the description of different applications.
For the setting method of AI curve 2 and AI cure 3, please refer to AI curve 1.
Code
b5-18
Parameter Name
Jump point of AI1 input corresponding setting
Setting Range
-100.0% ~100.0% b5-19 b5-20 b5-21 b5-22
Jump amplitude of AI1input corresponding setting
AI2 minimum input
Corresponding setting of AI2 minimum input
Second point input value of
AI2
0.0%~100.0%
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
-100.00% ~100.0%
0.00 V ~10.00 V
Default
0.0%
0.5%
0.00 V
0.0%
2.50V
69
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b5-23
Parameter Name
Corresponding setting of second point input value of
AI2
Setting Range
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-24 Third point input value of AI2 0.00 V ~ 10.00 V b5-25
Corresponding setting of third point input value of AI2
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-26 b5-27 b5-28 b5-29 b5-30
Fourth point input value of
AI2
Corresponding setting of fourth point input value of AI2
AI2 maximum input
Corresponding setting of AI2 maximum input
AI2 input filter time
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
-100.00% ~100.0%
0.00V~ 10.00 V
-100.00%~100.0%
0.00s~10.00s
Default
25.0%
5.00V
50.0%
7.50V
75.0%
10.00 V
100.0%
0.10s b5-31 b5-32 b5-33 b5-34 b5-35
Jump point of AI2 input corresponding setting
Jump amplitude of AI2 input corresponding setting
AI3 minimum input
Corresponding setting of AI3 minimum input
Second point input value of
AI3
-100.0%~100.0%
0.0% ~100.0%
0.00 V~10.00 V
-100.00%~100.0%
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
0.0%
0.5%
0.00 V
0.0%
2.50V b5-36
Corresponding setting of second point input value of
AI3
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-37
Third point input value of AI3
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V b5-38
Corresponding setting of third point input value of AI3
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-39 b5-40
Fourth point input value of
AI3
Corresponding setting of fourth point
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-41 0.00 V ~ 10.00 V b5-42 b5-43 b5-44
AI3 maximum input
Corresponding setting of AI3 maximum input
AI3 filter time
Jump point of AI3 input corresponding setting
-100.00% ~100.0%
0.00~10.00s
-100.0% ~100.0%
25.0%
5.00V
50.0%
7.50V
75.0%
10.00 V
100.0%
0.10s
0.0% b5-45
Jump amplitude of AI3 input corresponding setting
0.0% ~100.0%
0.5%
The AI terminals (AI1 to AI3) of EM11 all support the corresponding setting jump function, which fixes the
AI input corresponding setting at the jump point when AI input corresponding setting jumps around the jump range.
For example:
AI1 input voltage fluctuation around 5.00V and the amplitude range is 4.90V~5.10V. AI1 minimum input
70
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
0.00V corresponds to 0.00% and maximum input 10.00V corresponds to 100.0%。 The detected AI1 input corresponding setting varies between 49.0% and 51.0%.
If you set jump point b5-18 to 50.0% and jump amplitude b5-19 to 1.0%, then frequency inverter obtained
AI1 input corresponding setting is fixed to 50.0%, eliminating the fluctuation effect.
5.7 Group b6: Pulse/analog output terminals
Code
b6-00 FMP function selection b6-01 AO1 output function selection
Parameter Name Default
0
0
1 b6-02 AO2 output function selection
The output pulse frequency of the FMP terminal ranges from 0.01 kHz to "Maximum FMP output frequency" (b6-03). The value of b6-03 is between 0.01 kHz and 100.00 kHz.
The output range of AO1 and AO2 is 0V~10 V or 0mA~20mA. The relationship between pulse and analog output ranges and corresponding functions is listed in the following table.
Value
0
Function
Range (Corresponding to Pulse or Analog Output Range
0.0%~100.0%)
Running frequency 0Hz~ maximum frequency
1
2
Setting frequency
Output current
0Hz~ maximum frequency
0 ~2 times of rated motor current
3
4
5
6
Output torque (absolute value)
0~ 2 times of rated motor torque(absolute value of torque)
Output power
Output voltage
0 ~2 times of rated power
0 ~1.2 times of rated frequency inverter DC bus voltage
7
8
9
10
11
Motor rotational speed 0~rotational speed corresponding to maximum frequency
Output current 0.0A~1000.0 A
0.0V~000.0 V Output voltage
Output torque (actual value)
Pulse input
-200% of rated motor torque~ 200% of rated motor torque
0.01 kHz ~100.00 kHz
13
14
15
Length
Count value
0~ maximum set length
0 ~ maximum count value
16 Communication setting 0~32767
Code
b6-03
Parameter Name
Maximum FMP output frequency
Setting Range
0.01 kHz ~50.00 kHz
Default
50.00 kHz
If the FM terminal is used for pulse output, this parameter is used to set the maximum frequency of pulse output.
Code
b6-04
Parameter Name
AO1 offset coefficient
Setting Range
-100.0% ~100.0%
Default
0.0%
71
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b6-05
Parameter Name
AO1 gain
-10.00~10.00
Setting Range Default
1.00 b6-06 b6-07
AO2 offset coefficient
AO2 gain
-100.0% ~100.0%
-10.00 ~10.00
0.00%
1.00
These parameters are used to correct the zero drift of analog output and the output amplitude deviation. They can also be used to define the desired AO curve. If "b" represents zero offset, "k" represents gain, "Y" represents actual output, and "X" represents standard output, the actual output is: Y = kX + b.
The zero offset coefficient 100% of AO1 and AO2 corresponds to 10 V (or 20 mA). The standard output refers to the value corresponding to the analog output of 0 to 10 V (or 0 to 20 mA) with no zero offset or gain adjustment.
For example, if the analog output is used as the running frequency, and it is expected that the output is 8 V when the frequency is 0 and 3 V at the maximum frequency, the gain shall be set to -0.50, and the zero offset shall be set to 80%.
5.8 Group b7: Virtual digital input (VDI)/digital output (VDO) terminals
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
0
0
0
0
0
VDI1~ VDI5 have the same functions as DI terminals on the control board and can be used for digital input.
For more details, see description of b3-00 ~ b3-11.
Code
b7-05 b7-06
Parameter Name
VDI state setting mode
VDI state setting
Setting Range
Unit's digit: VDI1.
0: Valid decided by state of VDOx
1: Valid decided by b7-06
Ten's digit: VDI2.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Hundred's digit: VDI3.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Thousand's digit: VDI4.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Ten thousand's digit: VDI5.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Unit's digit: VDI1.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten's digit: VDI2
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Hundred's digit: VDI3
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Thousand's digit: VDI4
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Ten thousand's digit: VDI5.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Default
00000
00000
72
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Different from DI terminals, VDI state can be set in two modes, selected in b7-05:
For example 1:Decided by state of VDOx
Whether the state of VDI is valid or not, that is determined by the state of the corresponding VDO. VDI x is uniquely bound to VDO x (x is one of 1~5). For example, to implement the function that the frequency inverter reports an alarm and stops when the AI1 input exceeds the limit, perform the following setting:
1. Set VDI1 with function 44 "User-defined fault 1" (b7-00 = 44).
2. VDI1 terminal valid is decided by state of VDO1 (b7-05= xxx0).
3. Set VDO1 with function "AI1 input limit exceeded" (b7-11 = 31).
When the AI1 input exceeds the limit, VDO1 becomes ON. At this moment, VDI1 becomes ON and the frequency inverter receives you-defined fault 1. Then the frequency inverter reports Err27 and stops.
Example 2: Decided by b7-06
The VDI state is determined by b7-06. For example, to implement the function that the frequency inverter automatically enters the running state after power-on, perform the following setting:
1. Set VDI1 with function 1 "Forward RUN (FWD)" (b7-00 = 1).
2. Set b7-05 to xxx1: The state of VDI1 is decided by b7-06.
3. Set b7-06 to xxx1: VDI1 is valid.
4. Set b0-02 to 1: The command source to terminal control.
5. Set b2-32 to 0: Startup protection is not enabled.
When the frequency inverter completes initialization after power-on, it detects that VDI1 is valid and VDI1 is set with the function of forward RUN. That is, the frequency inverter receives the forward RUN command from the terminal. Therefore, the frequency inverter starts to run in forward direction.
Code
b7-07 b7-08 b7-09
Parameter Name
Function selection for AI1 used as DI
Function selection for AI2 used as DI
Function selection for AI3 used as DI
0~49
0~49
0~49
Setting Range Default
0
0
0 b7-10
Valid state selection for AI used as DI
Unit's digit: AI1.
0: High level valid
1: Low level valid
Ten's digit: AI2.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Hundred's digit: AI3.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
0
The functions of these parameters are to use AI as DI. When AI is used as DI, the AI state is high level if the
AI input voltage is 7 V or higher and is low level if the AI input voltage is 3 V or lower.
If the AI input voltage is between 3 V and 7 V, the AI state is hysteresis. And then b7-10 is used to determine whether high level valid or low level valid when AI is used as DI.
The setting of AI (used as DI) function is the same as that of DI. For details, see the descriptions of DI setting.
The following figure takes AI input voltage as an example to describe the relationship between AI input voltage and corresponding DI state.
73
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Diagram 6-22 Relationship of AI input voltage and corresponding DI status
Code
b7-11 b7-12 b7-13 b7-14 b7-15
Parameter Name
VDO1 function selection
VDO2 function selection
VDO3 function selection
VDO4 function selection
VDO5 function selection
Setting Range
0: connect with physical DIx internally
1~38
0: connect with physical DIx internally
1~38
0: connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
0:connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
0: connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
Default
38
38
38
38
38
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s b7-21 VDO valid state selection
Unit's digit: VDO1.
0: Positive logic valid
1: Reverse logic valid
Ten's digit: VDO2
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Hundred's digit: VDO3.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Thousand's digit: VDO4.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Ten thousand's digit: VDO5.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
00000
VDO functions are similar to the DO functions on the control board. The VDO can be used together with
VDI x to implement some simple logic control.
If VDO function is set to 0, the state of VDO1 to VDO5 is determined by the state of DI1 to DI5 on the control board. In this case, VDOx and DIx are one-to-one mapping relationship.
If VDO function is set to non-0, the function setting and use of VDOx are the same as DO in group b4.
The VDOx state valid can be set in b7-21. The application examples of VDIx involved the usage of VDOx, and please see these examples for your reference.
74
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
5.9 Group b8: AI/AO Correction
Code
b8-00 b8-01 b8-02 b8-03
Parameter Name
Ideal voltage of AI1 calibration 1
Sampling voltage of AI1 calibration 1
Ideal voltage of AI1 calibration 2
Sampling voltage of AI1 calibration 2
0.500~4.000 V
0.500~4.000 V
6.000~9.999 V
6.000~9.999 V
Setting Range
b8-04 b8-05 b8-06 b8-07 b8-08
Ideal voltage of AI2 calibration 1
Sampling voltage of AI2 calibration 1
Ideal voltage of AI2 calibration 2
Sampling voltage of AI2 calibration 2
Ideal voltage of AI3 calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
0.500~4.000 V
6.000~9.999 V
6.000~9.999 V
0.500~4.000 V b8-09
Sampling voltage of AI3 calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V b8-10 b8-11
Ideal voltage of AI3 calibration 2
Sampling voltage of AI3 calibration 2
6.000~9.999 V
6.000~9.999 V
These parameters are used to correct the AI to eliminate the impact of AI zero offset and gain.
Default
2.000V
2.000V
8.000V
8.000V
2.000V
2.000V
8.000V
8.000V
2.000V
2.000V
8.000V
8.000V
They have been corrected of delivery. When you resume the factory values, these parameters will be restored to the factory-corrected values. Generally, you need not perform correction in the applications.
Measured voltage indicates the actual output voltage value measured by instruments such as the multimeter.
Displayed voltage indicates the voltage display value sampled by the frequency inverter. For details, refer to the voltage displayed before AI correction in group U0.
During correction, send two voltage values to each AI terminal, and save the measured values and displayed values to the function codes b8-00 to b8-11. Then the frequency inverter will automatically perform AI zero offset and gain correction.
If the input voltage and the actual voltage sampled by the HC drive are inconsistent, perform correction on site. Take AI1 as an example. The on-site correction is as follows:
1. Send a voltage signal (approximately 2 V) to AI1.
2. Measure the AI1 voltage and save it to b8-00.
3. View the displayed value of U0-21 and save the value to b8-01.
4. Send a voltage signal (approximately 8 V) to AI1.
5. Measure AI1 voltage and save it to b8-02.
6. View the displayed value of U0-21 and save the value to b8-03.
At correction of AI2 and AI3, the actually sampled voltage is respectively queried in U0-22 and U0-23.
For AI1 and AI2, 2 V and 8 V are suggested as the correction voltages. For AI3, -8 V and 8V are suggested.
75
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b8-12 b8-13 b8-14 b8-15 b8-16
Parameter Name
Ideal voltage of AO1 calibration 1
Measured voltage of AO1 calibration 1
Ideal voltage of AO1 calibration 2
Measured voltage of
AO1calibration 2
Ideal voltage of AO2 calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
0.500~4.000 V
6.000~9.999 V
6.000~9.999 V
0.500~4.000 V b8-17 b8-18
Measured voltage of AO2 calibration 1
Ideal voltage of AO2 calibration 2
0.500~4.000 V
6.000~9.999 V b8-19
Measured voltage of AO2 calibration 2
These parameters are used to correct the AO.
6.000~9.999 V
Setting Range Default
2.000V
2.000V
8.000V
8.000V
2.000V
2.000V
8.000V
8.000V
They have been corrected of delivery. When you store the factory default values, these parameters will be restored to the factory-corrected values. Generally you needn’t perform correction in the applications.
Ideal target voltage indicates the theoretical output voltage of the frequency inverter. Measured voltage indicates the actual output voltage value measured by instruments such as the multimeter.
5.10 Group b9: Operation Panel and Display
Code
b9-00 b9-01
Parameter Name
STOP/RESET key function
MF.K Key function selection
Setting Range
0: STOP/RESET key enabled only in operation panel control
1: STOP/RESET key enabled in any operation mode
0: MF.K key disabled
1: Switchover between operation panel control and remote command control
(terminal or communication)
2: Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation
3: Forward JOG
4: Reverse JOG
Default
0
0
MF.K key refers to multifunctional key. You can set the function of the MF.K key by using this parameter.
You can perform switchover by using this key both in stop or running state.
0: MF.K key disabled
This key is disabled.
1: Switchover between operation panel control and remote command control (terminal or communication)
You can perform switchover from the present command source to the operation panel control (local operation). If the present command source is operation panel control, this key is invalid.
2: Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation
76
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
You can change the direction of the frequency inverter running by using the MF.K key. It is valid only when the present command source is operation panel control.
3: Forward JOG
You can perform forward JOG (FJOG) by using the MF.K key.
4: Reverse JOG
You can perform reverse JOG (FJOG) by using the MF.K key.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
0000~FFFF:
Default
b9-02
LED display running parameters 1
0x1f
If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set b9-02 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
0000~FFFF: b9-03
LED display running parameters 2
If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set b9-03 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
0x0800
77
5. Description of Function Codes
Code Parameter Name
EM11 User’s Manual
Setting Range Default
b9-03
LED display running parameters 2
0x0800
These two parameters are used to set the monitoring parameters that can be viewed when the frequency inverter is in the running state. You can view a maximum of 32 running state. The displaying sequence is displayed from the lowest bit of b9-02.
Code Parameter Name
0000~FFFF:
Setting Range Default
b9-04
LED display parameter of stopping
0x2033
If a parameter needs to be displayed during the running, set the corresponding bit to 1, and set b9-04 to the hexadecimal equivalent of this binary number.
Code
b9-05
Parameter Name
Load speed display coefficient
0.0001~ 6.5000
Setting Range Default
1.0000
This parameter is used to adjust the relationship between the output frequency of frequency inverter and the load speed. For details, see the description of b9-06.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
78
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b9-06
Number of decimal places for load speed display
0: 0 decimal display
1: 1 decimal display
2: 2 decimal display
3: 3 decimal display
1 b9-06 is used to set the number of decimal places for load speed display. The following gives an example to explain how to calculate the load speed:
Assume that b9-05 (Load speed display coefficient) is 2.000 and b9-06 is 2 (2 decimal places). When the running frequency of the frequency inverter is 40.00 Hz, the load speed is 40.00 x 2.000 = 80.00 (display of
2 decimal places).
If the frequency inverter is in the stop state, the load speed is the speed corresponding to the set frequency, namely, "setting load speed". If the set frequency is 50.00 Hz, the load speed in the stop state is 50.00 x
2.000 = 100.00 (display of 2 decimal places).
Code Parameter Name
b9-07
Heatsink temperature
0.0°C ~100.0°C
Setting Range Default
0°C
It is used to display the temperature of heatsink.
Different inverter model has different temperature value for over-temperature protection.
Code Parameter Name
b9-08
Accumulative power-on time
0~65535 h
Setting Range Default
0 h
It is used to display the accumulative power-on time of the frequency inverter since the delivery. If the time reaches the set power-on time (b2-21), the terminal with the digital output function 24 becomes ON.
Code Parameter Name
b9-09
Accumulative running time
0~65535 h
Setting Range Default
0 h
It is used to display the accumulative running time of the frequency inverter. After the accumulative running time reaches the value set in b2-21, the terminal with the digital output function 12 becomes ON.
Code Parameter Name
b9-10
Accumulative power consumption
0~65535 kWh
Setting Range Default
0 kWh
It is used to display the accumulative power consumption of the frequency inverter until now.
5.11 Group bA: Communication parameters
Code Parameter Name
bA-00
Communication type selection
0: Modbus protocol
Setting Range Default
0
The EM11 now supports Modbus, later will add the communication protocol such as PROFIBUS-DP and
CANopen. For details, see the description of “EM11 communication protocol”.
79
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bA-01
Parameter Name
Baud ratio setting
Setting Range
Unit's digit: Modbus baud ratio.
0: 300 BPS
1: 600 BPS
2: 1200 BPS
3: 2400 BPS
4: 4800 BPS
5: 9600 BPS
6: 19200 BPS
7: 38400 BPS
Default
5
This parameter is used to set the data transfer baud rate from host computer to frequency inverter. Please note that baud rate of the host computer and the inverter should be consistent. Otherwise, the communication is impossible. The higher the baud rate is, the faster the communication is.
Code
bA-02
Parameter Name
Modbus Data format
Setting Range
0: No check, data format <8,N,2>
1: Even parity check, data format<8,E,1>
2: Odd Parity check, data format<8,O,1>
3: No check, data format <8,N,1>
Valid for Modbus
Default
0
The host computer and inverter setup data format must be consistent, otherwise, communication is impossible.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
bA-03
Broadcast address
1~249 (0: Broadcast address) Valid for Modbus
Default
0
When the local address is set to 0, that is, broadcast address, it can realize the broadcast function of host computer.
The address is unique; it is base of point to point communication between host computer and frequency inverter.
Code
bA-04
Parameter Name
Modbus response delay
Setting Range
0~20 ms (Only valid for Modbus)
Default
2 ms
Response delay: it refers to the interval time from the inverter finishes receiving data to response data back to the host machine. If the response delay is less than the system processing time, then the response time is based on the time of the system processing. If the response delaying time is more than the system processing time, after the system processes the data, it should be delayed to wait until the response delay time is reached, and then sending back data to host machine.
Code Parameter Name
bA-05
Communication timeout
0.0s:invalid
0.1s~60.0s
Valid for Modbus
Setting Range Default
0.0s
When this parameter is set to 0.0s, the communication interface timeout function is invalid.
When the function code is set to a value, if the interval time between this communication and the next communication is beyond the communication timeout, the system will report communication failure error
80
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
(Err16). At normal application, it will be set as invalid. If in the continuous communication system, setting this parameter, you can monitor the communication status.
Code Parameter Name
Modbus protocol bA-06 data transmission format selection
Setting Range
Unit's digit: Modbus protocol.
0: Non-standard Modbus protocol
1: Standard Modbus protocol
Default
1 bA-06=1: Select standard Modbus protocol. bA-06=0: When reading the command, the slave machine return is one byte more than the standard Modbus protocol’s, for details, refer to communication data structure of appendix .
Code Parameter Name
bA-07
Communication reading current resolution
0: 0.01A
1: 0.1A
Setting Range
It is used to confirm the unit of current value when the communication reads the output current.
Default
0
5.12 Group bb: Fault and Protection
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
bb-00 G/P type selection
0: P type
1: G type
This parameter is used to display the delivered model and cannot be modified.
0: Applicable to variable torque load (fan and pump) with rated parameters specified.
Default
1
1: Applicable to constant torque general load with rated parameters specified.
Code Parameter Name
bb-01
Motor overload protection selection bb-02
Motor overload protection gain
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0.20~10.00
Setting Range Default
0
1.00
bb-01 =0
The motor overload protective function is disabled. The motor is exposed to potential damage due to overheating. A thermal relay is suggested to be installed between the frequency inverter and the motor.
bb-01 = 1
The frequency inverter judges whether the motor is overloaded according to the inverse time-lag curve of the motor overload protection.
The inverse time-lag curve of the motor overload protection is:
220% × (bb-02) × rated motor current
(if the load remains at this value for one minute, the frequency inverter reports motor overload fault), or
150% × (bb-02) ×rated motor current
(if the load remains at this value for 60 minutes, the frequency inverter reports motor overload fault).
Set bb-02 properly based on the actual overload capacity. If the value of bb-02 is set too large, may result in damaging to the motor because the motor overheats but the frequency inverter does not report the alarm.
81
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bb-03
Parameter Name
Motor overload pre-warning coefficient
50%~100%
Setting Range Default
80%
This function is used to give a warning signal to the control system via DO before motor overload protection.
This parameter is used to determine the percentage, at which pre- warning is performed before motor overload. The larger the value is, the less advance the pre-warning will be.
When the output current of the frequency inverter is greater than the value of the overload inverse time-lag curve multiplied by bb-03, the DO terminal of the frequency inverter set with motor overload pre-warning becomes ON.
Code
bb-04 bb-05
Parameter Name
Overvoltage stall gain
Overvoltage stall protective voltage
0~100
120%~150%
Setting Range Default
0
130%
When the DC bus voltage exceeds the value of bb-05 (Overvoltage stall protective voltage) during deceleration of the frequency inverter, the frequency inverter stops deceleration and keeps the present running frequency. After the bus voltage declines, the frequency inverter continues to decelerate. bb-04 (Overvoltage stall gain) is used to adjust the overvoltage suppression capacity of the frequency inverter. The larger the value is, the greater the overvoltage suppression capacity will be. In the prerequisite of no overvoltage occurrence, set bb-04 to a small value.
For small-inertia load, the value should be small. Otherwise, the system dynamic response will be slow. For large-inertia load, the value should be large. Otherwise, the suppression result will be poor and an overvoltage fault may occur.
If the overvoltage stall gain is set to 0, the overvoltage stall function is disabled. The overvoltage stall protective voltage setting 100% corresponds to the base values in the following table:
Voltage Class Corresponding Base Value
Single-phase 220 V
Three-phase 220 V
Three-phase 380 V
Three-phase 480 V
Three-phase 690 V
290 V
290 V
530 V
620 V
880 V
Code
bb-06
Parameter Name
Over current stall gain
0~100
Setting Range Default
20 bb-07
Over current stall protective current
100%~200% 150%
Over current stall: When the output current exceeds the over current stall protective current (bb-07) during acceleration/deceleration of the frequency inverter, the frequency inverter stops acceleration/deceleration and keeps the present running frequency. After the output current declines to below bb-07, the frequency inverter continues to accelerate/decelerate. bb-07 (over current stall protective current) is used to select the current protection value of over current stall
82
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes function. This function will be carried out by frequency inverter, when the current exceeds bb-07. This value is the percentage of motor rated current. bb-06 (over current stall gain) is used to adjust the over current suppression capacity of the frequency inverter. The larger the value is, the greater the over current suppression capacity will be. In condition of no over current occurrence, should set bb-06 to a small value.
For small-inertia load, the value should be small. Otherwise, the system dynamic response will be slow. For large-inertia load, the value should be large. Otherwise, the suppression result will be poor and over current fault may occur. If the over current stall gain is set to 0, the over current stall function is disabled.
Diagram 5-23 Diagram of the over current stall protection function
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
bb-08
Protection of short-circuit to ground
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 after power-on
It is used to determine whether to check the motor is short-circuited to ground after power-on of the frequency inverter. If this function is enabled, the frequency inverter's UVW will have voltage output a while after power-on.
Code Parameter Name
bb-09 Fault auto reset times 0~99
Setting Range Default
0
It is used to set the times of fault auto resets if this function is used. After the value is exceeded, the frequency inverter will remain in the fault state.
Code Parameter Name
bb-10
Relay action selection during fault auto reset
0: Not act
1: Act
Setting Range Default
0
It is used to decide whether DO acts during the fault auto reset if the fault auto reset function is used.
83
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bb-11
Parameter Name
Time interval of fault auto reset
0.1s~100.0s
Setting Range
It is used to set the waiting time from the frequency inverter alarm to fault auto reset.
Default
1.0s
Code
bb-12
Parameter Name
Input phase loss protection/contactor energizing protection selection
Setting Range
Unit's digit: Input phase loss protection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Ten's digit: Contactor energizing protection
0,1( same as Unit’s digit)
It is used to determine whether to perform input phase loss or contactor energizing protection.
The EM11 models that provide this function are listed in the following table.
Voltage Class
Single-phase 220 V
Three-phase 220 V
Models
None
From 11 kW G model
Default
0
Three-phase 380 V
Three-phase 690 V
From 18.5 kW G model
From 18.5 kW G model
For every voltage class, the EM11 frequency inverters provide function of input phase loss or contactor energizing protection for above model. The EM11 Frequency inverters do not have this function below the power listed in the table no matter whether bb-12 is set to 0 or 1.
Code
bb-13
Parameter Name
Output phase loss protection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Setting Range
It is used to determine whether to perform output phase loss protection.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
bb-14 Off load protection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled bb-15
Off load detection level
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current)
Default
0
Default
0
1.0% bb-16
Off load detection time
0.0s~60.0s
1.0s
If off load protection is enabled, when the output current of the frequency inverter is lower than the detection level (bb-15) and the duration time exceeds the detection time (bb-16), the output frequency of frequency inverter automatically declines to 7% of the rated frequency. During the protection, the frequency inverter automatically accelerates to the set frequency if the load restore to normal.
Code
bb-17
Parameter Name
Over-speed detection value
Setting Range
0.0%~50.0% (maximum frequency) bb-18
Over-speed detection time
0.0s~60.0s
This function is valid only when the frequency inverter runs in the VC+PG mode.
Default
20.0%
1.0s
84
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
If the actual motor rotational speed detected by the frequency inverter exceeded the maximum frequency and the excessive value is greater than the value of bb-17 and the lasting time exceeded the value of bb-18, the frequency inverter reports Err43 and acts according to the selected fault protection action.
If the bb-18(over-speed detection time) is 0.0s, the over-speed detection function is disabled.
Code Parameter Name
Detection value of bb-19 too large speed deviation bb-20
Detection time of too large speed deviation
0.0s~60.0s
Setting Range
0.0%~50.0% (maximum frequency)
Default
20.0%
5.0s
This function is valid only when the frequency inverter runs in the VC+PG mode.
If the frequency inverter detects the deviation over than bb-19 between the actual motor rotational and the setting motor frequency, and the duration time exceeds the value of bb-20, the frequency inverter reports
Err42 and act according to the selected fault protection action.
If bb-20 (Detection time of too large speed deviation) is 0.0s, this function is disabled.
Code Parameter Name
bb-21
Action selection at instantaneous power failure
0: Invalid
1: Decelerate
2: Decelerate to stop
Setting Range Default
0 bb-22 bb-23
Voltage rally judging time at instantaneous power failure
Judging voltage of instantaneous power failure
0.00s ~100.00s
60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage)
0.00s
80.0% bb-24
Judging voltage of instantaneous power failure restoring
60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage) 90.0%
Of instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the DC bus voltage of the Frequency inverter reduces.
This function enables the Frequency inverter to compensate the DC bus voltage reduction with the load feedback energy by reducing the output frequency so as to keep the Frequency inverter running continuously.
If bb-21 = 1, when instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the frequency inverter decelerates until DC bus voltage restore to normal, the frequency inverter accelerates to the set frequency. If the DC bus voltage remains normal for the time exceeding the value set in bb-22, it is considered that the DC bus voltage restores to normal.
If bb-21 = 2, when instantaneous power failure or sudden voltage dip, the frequency inverter decelerates to stop.
85
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bb-25 bb-26 bb-27
Diagram 5-24 Frequency inverter action diagram of instantaneous power failure
Parameter Name
Type of motor temperature sensor
Setting Range
0: No temperature sensor
1: PT100
2: PT1000
Motor overheat protection threshold
Motor overheat pre-warning threshold
0°C~200°C
0°C~200°C
Default
0
120°C
100°C
The signal of the motor temperature sensor needs to be connected to the optional I/O extension card. This card is an optional component. PG card also can be used for the temperature signal input with motor over-temperature protection function. Please contact with manufacturer or distributors.
The PG card interface of the EM11 supports both PT100 and PT1000. Set the sensor type correctly during the use. You can view the motor temperature via parameter U0-34.
If the motor temperature exceeds the value set in bb-26, the frequency inverter reports an alarm and acts according to the selected fault protection action.
If the motor temperature exceeds the value set in bb-27, the DO terminal of frequency inverter set with motor overheat warning becomes ON.
86
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code Parameter Name
bb-28
Overvoltage threshold
200.0~2500.0 V
Setting Range Default
830.0 V
It is used to set the overvoltage threshold of the frequency inverter. The default values of different voltage classes are listed in the following table.
Voltage Class
Single-phase 220 V
Three-phase 220 V
Default Overvoltage
Threshold
400.0 V
400.0 V
Three-phase 380 V
Three-phase 480 V
830.0 V
890.0 V
Three-phase 690 V 1300.0 V
Note: The default value is also the upper limit of the frequency inverter's internal overvoltage protection voltage. The parameter becomes effective only when the setting of bb-28 is lower than the default value. If the setting is higher than the default value, use the default value.
Code Parameter Name
bb-29
Under voltage threshold
50.0%~150.0%
Setting Range Default
100.0%
It is used to set the under voltage threshold of Err09. The under voltage threshold 100% of the frequency inverter of different voltage classes corresponds to different nominal values, as listed in the following table.
Voltage Class
Single-phase 220 V
Three-phase 220 V
Three-phase 380 V
Three-phase 480 V
Three-phase 690 V
Three-phase 1140V
Nominal Value of under voltage threshold
200 V
200 V
350 V
450 V
650 V
1350V
Code Parameter Name
bb-30 Brake unit use ratio 0%~100%
Setting Range Default
100%
It is valid only for the frequency inverter with internal braking unit and used to adjust the duty ratio of the braking unit. The larger the value of this parameter is, the better the braking result will be. However, too larger value causes great fluctuation of DC bus voltage during the braking process.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
bb-31
Rapid current limit
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default
1
The rapid current limit function can reduce the frequency inverter over current faults at maximum, guaranteeing uninterrupted running of the frequency inverter.
However, long-time rapid current limit may cause the frequency inverter to overheat, which is not allowed.
In this case, the frequency inverter will report Err40, indicating the frequency inverter is overloaded and needs to stop.
87
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bb-32 bb-33 bb-34 bb-35
Parameter Name
Fault protection action selection 1
Fault protection action selection 2
Fault protection action selection 3
Fault protection action selection 4
Setting Range
Unit's digit: Motor overload, Err11.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
2: Continue to run
Ten's digit: Power input phase loss, Err12.
Same as unit's digit
Hundred's digit: Power output phase loss, Err13.
Same as unit's digit
Thousand's digit: External equipment fault, Err15.
Same as unit's digit
Ten thousand's digit: Communication fault, Err16.
Same as unit's digit
Unit's digit: Encoder/PG card fault, Err20.
0: Free stop
Ten's digit: EEPROM read-write fault, Err21.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
Hundred's digit : Reserved
Thousand's digit: Motor Overheat, Err25.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten thousand's digit: Running time reached, Err26.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Unit's digit: User-defined fault 1,Err27.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten's digit: User-defined fault 2,Err28.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Hundred's digit: Accumulative power-on time reached,Err29.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Thousand's digit: Off load, Err30.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
2: reduce to 7% of rated motor frequency and continue running. If the load recovers and it will auto regain to setting frequency.
Ten thousand's digit: PID feedback lost during running,
Err31.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Unit's digit: Speed deviation too large, Err42
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten's digit: Motor over-speed, Err43.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Hundred's digit: Initial position fault, Err51.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
If "free stop" is selected, the frequency inverter displays Err** and directly stops.
Default
00000
00000
00000
00000
If "Stop according to the stop mode" is selected, the frequency inverter displays A** and stops according to the stop mode. After stop, the frequency inverter displays Err**.
If "Continue to run" is selected, the frequency inverter continues to run and displays A**. The running
88
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes frequency is set in bb-36.
Code
bb-36
Parameter Name
Frequency selection for continuing to run of fault
Setting Range
0: Current running frequency
1: Set frequency
2: Frequency upper limit
3: Frequency lower limit
4: Backup frequency of abnormality (bb-37)
Default
0 bb-37
Backup frequency of abnormality
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency) 1.0%
If a fault occurs during the running of the frequency inverter and the handling of fault is set to "continue to run", the frequency inverter displays A** and continues to run at the frequency set in bb-36.
The setting of bb-37 is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency.
5.13 Group bC: Fault detection Parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
0~99
0~99
0~99 bC-02 3rd fault type (latest)
It is used to record the types of the most recent three faults of the frequency inverter. 0 indicates no fault. For possible causes and solution of each fault, refer to Chapter 8.
Code Parameter Name Description
bC-03 bC-04 bC-05
Frequency of latest fault
Current of latest fault
DC Bus voltage of latest fault
It displays the frequency when the latest fault occurs.
It displays the current when the latest fault occurs.
It displays the DC bus voltage when the latest fault occurs. bC-06 bC-07
Input terminals status of latest fault
Output terminal status of latest fault
It displays the status of all DI terminals when the latest fault occurs.
The sequence is as follows:
BIT9 BIT8 BIT7 BIT6 BIT5 BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
DI0 DI9 DI8 DI7 DI6 DI5 DI4 DI3 DI2 DI1
If a DI is ON, the setting is 1. If the DI is OFF, the setting is 0. The value is the equivalent decimal number converted from the DI status.
It displays the status of all output terminals when the latest fault occurs. The sequence is as follows:
BIT4 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0
DO2 DO1 REL2 REL1 FMP
If an output terminal is ON, the setting is 1. If the output terminal is
OFF, the setting is 0. The value is the equivalent decimal number converted from the DI statuses. bC-08 bC-09
Frequency inverter status of latest fault
Power-on time of latest fault
Reserved
It displays the present power-on time when the latest fault occurs.
89
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code Parameter Name
bC-10 bC-11
Running time of latest fault
Frequency of 2nd fault bC-12 Current of 2nd fault bC-13
DC Bus voltage of
2nd fault bC-14 bC-15
Input terminal status of 2nd fault
Output terminal status of 2nd fault bC-16 bC-17
Frequency inverter status of 2nd fault
Power-on time of
2nd fault bC-18 bC-19
Running time of 2nd fault
Frequency of 1st fault bC-20 Current of 1st fault bC-21 bC-22 bC-23 bC-24 bC-25 bC-26
DC Bus voltage of
1st fault
Input terminal status of 1st fault
Output terminal status of 1st fault
Frequency inverter status of 1st fault
Power-on time of 1st fault
Running time of 1st fault
Description
It displays the present running time when the latest fault occurs.
Same as bC-03~bC-10.
Same as bC-03~bC-10.
5.14 Group C0: Process Control PID Function
PID control is a general process control method. By performing proportional, integral and differential operations on the difference between the feedback signal and the target signal, it adjusts the output frequency and constitutes a feedback system to stabilize the controlled counter around the target value.
It is applied to process control such as flow control, pressure control and temperature control. The following figure shows the principle block diagram of PID control.
90
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes 5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
0: Forward action
When the feedback value is smaller than the PID setting, the frequency inverter's output frequency rises. For example, the winding tension control requires forward PID action.
1: Reverse action
When the feedback value is smaller than the PID setting, the frequency inverter's output frequency reduces.
For example, the unwinding tension control requires reverse PID action.
Note this function is influenced by the DI function 24 "Reverse PID action direction".
Diagram 6-25 Principle block diagram of PID control.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-05
PID setting feedback range
0~65535 1000
0: C0-01
1: AI1
This parameter is a non-dimensional unit. It is used for PID setting display (U0-15) and PID feedback display (U0-16).
C0-02
2: AI2
3: AI3
Relative value 100% of PID setting feedback corresponds to the value of C0-05. If C0-05 is set to 2000 and
C0-00 PID setting source 0
PID setting is 100.0%, the PID setting display (U0-15) is 2000.
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
6: Multi-function
Code Parameter Name
Proportional gain
Setting Range Default
C0-01
PID digital setting
0.0%~100.0% 50.0%
C0-00 is used to select the channel of target process PID setting. The PID setting is a relative value and ranges from 0.0% to 100.0%. The PID feedback is also a relative value. The purpose of PID control is to
C0-07 make the PID setting and PID feedback equal.
KP1
Integral time TI1
0.00~10.0 20.0
0.01s~10.00s 2.00s
C0-08 Differential time TD1 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s
C0-06 (Proportional gain Kp1)
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
It decides the regulating intensity of the PID regulator. The higher the Kp1 is, the larger the regulating intensity is. The value 10.00 indicates when the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is 100.0%,
PID setting change time
The PID setting change time indicates the time required for PID setting changing from 0.0% to 100.0%.
C0-07 (Integral time Ti1)
The PID setting changes linearly according to the change time, reducing the impact caused by sudden setting change on the system.
It decides the integral regulating intensity. The shorter the integral time is, the larger the regulating intensity is. When the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is 100.0%, the integral regulator performs continuous adjustment for the time. Then the adjustment amplitude reaches the maximum frequency.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
0: AI1
1: AI2
2: AI3
3: Pulse setting (HDI)
Default
C0-03
PID feedback source
4: AI1 – AI2
5: AI1 + AI2
6: MAX (|AI1|, |AI2|)
7: MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|)
0
8: Communication setting
This parameter is used to select the feedback signal channel of process PID. The PID feedback is a relative value and ranges from 0.0% to 100.0%. Similarly, the feedback of PID is also a relative value. The function of PID is to make the two values the equal.
C0-08 (Differential time Td1)
It decides the regulating intensity of the PID regulator on the deviation change. The longer the differential time is, the larger the regulating intensity is. Differential time is the time within which the feedback value change reaches 100.0%, and then the adjustment amplitude reaches the maximum frequency.
Code
C0-09
C0-10
Parameter Name
Proportional gain
KP2
Setting Range Default
0.00~10.00 20.0
Integral time TI2
0.01s~10.00s 2.00s
C0-11 Differential time TD2 0.00s~10.00s 0.000s
C0-12
PID parameter switchover condition
0: No switchover
1: Switchover via DI
2: Automatic switchover based on deviation
0
Code
C0-04
Parameter Name
PID action direction
0: Forward action
1: Reverse action
Setting Range Default
0
C0-13
PID parameter switchover deviation
1
0.0% ~ C0-14 20.0%
91 92
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-14
PID parameter switchover deviation
C0-13 ~ 100.0% 80.0%
2
In some applications, PID parameters switchover is required when one group of PID parameters cannot satisfy the requirement of the whole running process.
These parameters are used for switchover between two groups of PID parameters. Regulator parameters
C0-09 ~ C0-11 are set in the same way as C0-06 ~ C0-08.
The switchover can be implemented either via a DI terminal or automatically implemented based on the deviation.
If you select switchover via a DI terminal, the DI must be set with function 43 "PID parameter switchover".
If the DI is OFF, group 1 (C0-06 ~ C0-08) is selected. If the DI is ON, group 2 (C0-09 to C0-11) is selected.
If you select automatic switchover, when the absolute value of the deviation between PID feedback and
PID setting is smaller than the value of C0-13, group 1 is selected. When the absolute value of the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is higher than the value of C0-14, group 2 is selected. When the deviation is between C0-13 and C0-14, the PID parameters are the linear interpolated value of the two groups of parameter values.
Code
C0-15
Diagram 5-26 PID parameters switchover
Parameter Name
PID integral property
Setting Range
Unit's digit: Integral separated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten's digit: Whether to stop integral operation when the output reaches the limit.
0: Continue integral operation
1: Stop integral operation
Default
00
Integral separation
If integral separation is set to valid, and the DI is defined as function 22 "PID integral pause". In this case, only proportional and differential operations take effect.
If integral separation is set to invalid, no matter whether the DI set with function 22 "PID integral pause" is
ON or not, integral separation remains invalid.
Stop integral
After the output has reached to maximum or minimum limit in PID operation, we can select to stop the integral operation or not. If we select to stop, it may help to reduce the PID overshoot.
93
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
C0-16
C0-17
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
PID initial value
0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
PID initial value holding time
0.00s~650.00s 0.00s
When the frequency inverter starts up, the PID output initial value (C0-16) , and sustain the holding time
(C0-17), the PID start close-loop calculation .
Diagram 5-27 PID initial value function
Code
C0-18
Parameter Name Setting Range
Frequency upper limit of PID reverse 0.00 ~ maximum frequency rotation
Default
2.00 Hz
In some situations, only when the PID output frequency is a negative value (frequency inverter reverse rotation), PID setting and PID feedback can be equal. However, too high reverse rotation frequency is prohibited in some applications, and C0-18 is used to determine the reverse rotation frequency upper limit.
Code
C0-19
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
PID deviation limit 0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
If the deviation between PID feedback and PID setting is smaller than the value of C0-19, PID control stops.
The small deviation between PID feedback and PID setting will make the output frequency stabilize, which is effective for some closed-loop control applications.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
C0-20
PID differential limit 0.00%~100.00% 0.10%
It is used to set the PID differential output range. In PID control, the differential operation may easily cause system oscillation. Thus, the PID differential regulation is restricted to a small range.
Code
C0-21
Parameter Name
Maximum positive deviation between two PID outputs
Setting Range Default
0.00%~100.00% 1.00%
C0-22
Maximum negative deviation between
0.00%~100.00% 1.00% two PID outputs
This function is used to limit the deviation between two PID outputs (2 ms per PID output) to suppress the rapid change of PID output and stabilize the running of the frequency inverter.
94
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes 5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
C0-21 and C0-22 respectively are corresponding to the maximum absolute value of the output deviation in forward direction and in reverse direction.
Code
C1-10
Parameter Name
Multi-function 10
Setting Range Default
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Code
C0-23
Parameter Name
PID feedback filter time
Setting Range Default
C0-24
PID output filter time 0.00s~60.00s 0.00s
C0-23 is used to filter the PID feedback, helping to reduce interference on the feedback but slowing the
C1-11
C1-12
C1-13
C1-14
Multi-function 11 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 12
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 13
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 14 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 15
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function can be the setting source of frequency, V/F separated voltage and process PID. The response of the process closed-loop system.
C0-24 is used to filter the PID output frequency, helping to weaken sudden change of the frequency inverter
Multi-function is relative value and ranges from -100.0% to 100.0%.
As frequency source, it is a percentage relative to the maximum frequency. As V/F separated voltage source, it is a percentage relative to the rated motor voltage. As process PID setting source, it does not require conversion. output frequency but slowing the response of the process closed-loop system.
Code
C0-25
C0-26
Parameter Name
Detection value of
PID feedback loss
Detection time of PID feedback loss
Setting Range
0.0%: Not judging feedback loss 0.1%~100.0%
Default
0.0%
These parameters are used to judge whether PID feedback is lost.
If the PID feedback is smaller than the value of C0-25 and the lasting time exceeds the value of C0-26, the frequency inverter reports Err31 and acts according to the selected fault protection action.
Code
C0-27
Parameter Name
PID operation at stop
Setting Range
0: No PID operation at stop
1: PID operation at stop
Default
0
It is used to select whether to continue PID operation in the state of stopping. Generally, to set the PID operation stops when the frequency inverter stops.
Multi-function can be switched over based on different states of DI terminals. For details, see the descriptions of group b3.
C1-16
Parameter Name
Multi-function 0 source
Setting Range
0: Set by C1-00
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: PID
6: Set by preset frequency (b0-12), modified via terminal UP/ DOWN
Default
0
It determines the setting channel of multi-function 0. You can perform convenient switchover between the setting channels. When multi-function or simple PLC is used as frequency source, the switchover between two frequency sources can be realized easily.
5.15 Group C1:Multi-function
5.16 Group C2: Simple PLC
The Multi-function of EM11 has many functions. Besides multi-speed, it can be used as the setting source of the V/F separated voltage source and setting source of process PID. In addition, the Multi-function is relative value.
The simple PLC function is different from the EM11 user programmable function. Simple PLC can only
Code
C1-00
C1-01
C1-02
C1-03
C1-04
C1-05
C1-06
C1-07
C1-08
Code
C2-00
Parameter Name
Simple PLC running mode
Setting Range
0: Stop after the Frequency inverter runs one cycle
1: Keep final values after the frequency inverter runs one cycle
2: Repeat after the frequency inverter runs one cycle
Default
0 complete simple combination of Multi-function.
C1-09
0: Stop after the frequency inverter runs one cycle
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
The frequency inverter stops after running one cycle, and will not start up until receiving another command.
Multi-function 0 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 1
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 2
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 3 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 4
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 5
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 6 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 7 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 8
-100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Multi-function 9 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0%
95 96
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code
C2-01
Diagram 5-28 Simple PLC when used as frequency source
Parameter Name Setting Range
Simple PLC record selection
Unit's digit: Record of power failure.
0: no record after power off
1: record after power off
Ten's digit: Record of stopping.
0: no record after stopping
1:record after stopping
Default
00
PLC record of power failure indicates that the frequency inverter memorizes the PLC running stage and running frequency before power failure, and frequency inverter will continue to run from the memorized stage after it is powered on again. If the unit's digit is set to 0, the frequency inverter restarts the PLC process after it is powered on again.
PLC record of stopping indicates that the frequency inverter records the PLC running stage and running frequency of stop, and frequency inverter will continue to run from the recorded stage after power on again.
If the ten's digit is set to 0, the frequency inverter will restarts the PLC process after it power on again.
Code
C2-02
Parameter Name
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 0
Setting Range Default
C2-03
C2-04
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC
Segment 0
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 1
C2-05
C2-06
C2-07
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC
Segment 1
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 2
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC
Segment 2
97
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
98
Code
C2-08
C2-09
C2-10
C2-11
C2-12
C2-13
C2-14
C2-15
C2-16
C2-17
C2-18
C2-19
C2-20
C2-21
C2-25
Parameter Name
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 3
Setting Range Default
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC 0~3 0
Segment 3
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 4
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC 0~3 0
Segment 4
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 5
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC 0~3 0
Segment 5
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 6
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC 0~3 0
Segment 6
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 7
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC
Segment 7
0~3 0
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 8
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC 0~3 0
Segment 8
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 9
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC 0~3 0
Segment 9
C2-22
C2-23
PLC Segment 10
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC 0~3 0
Segment 10
C2-24
PLC Segment 11
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC 0~3 0
Segment 11
C2-26
PLC Segment 12
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes 5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
C2-27
C2-28
C2-29
C2-30
C2-31
C2-32
C2-33
C2-34
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
It is variable swing amplitude system. The swing amplitude varies with the central frequency (setting
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC frequency).
Segment 12
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 13
Code Parameter Name
Acceleration/deceleration time of simple PLC
Swing frequency
0~3 0 amplitude
Segment 13
Textile jump
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 14
0.0s(h)~6553.5s(h) 0.0s
It is fixed swing amplitude system. The swing amplitude is fixed.
C3-02 frequency amplitude of Swing running
Setting Range
0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
0.0%~50.0% 0.0%
Acceleration/deceleration
Default
time of simple PLC
Segment 14
Running time of simple
This parameter is used to set the jump frequency amplitude of swing running. The swing frequency is limited by the frequency upper limit and frequency lower limit.
If swing frequency is relative to the central frequency (C3-00 = 0), the actual swing amplitude AW=
PLC Segment 15 b0-07 (Frequency source) ×C3-01(Swing frequency amplitude).
Acceleration/deceleration
If swing frequency is relative to the maximum frequency (C3-00 = 1), the actual swing amplitude AW= time of simple PLC
Segment 15
0~3 0
The jump frequency is relative to the percentage of swing frequency amplitude. That is to say, jump
Time unit of simple PLC running
0: s (second)
1: h (hour)
0 frequency = Swing frequency running amplitude AW×C3-02 (Jump frequency amplitude).
If Swing frequency amplitude is relative to the central frequency (C3-00 = 0), the jump frequency is a variable value.
5.17 Group C3: Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Count
If Swing frequency amplitude is relative to the maximum frequency (C3-00 = 1), the jump frequency is a fixed value.
The swing frequency function is applied to the textile and chemical fiber fields and the applications where traversing and winding functions are required.
The swing frequency function indicates that the output frequency of the frequency inverter swings up and down with the setting frequency as the center. The trace of running frequency at the time axis is shown in
Code
C3-03
Parameter Name
Swing frequency cycle
Setting Range Default
0.1s~3000.0s 10.0s the following figure.
The swing amplitude is set in C3-00 and C3-01. When C3-01 is set to 0, the swing amplitude is 0 and the
C3-04
Triangular wave rising time coefficient
0.1%~100.0% 50.0% swing frequency does not take effect.
C3-03 specifies the time of a complete swing frequency cycle.
Diagram 5-29 Swing frequency control
Code
C3-00
Parameter Name
Swing frequency setting mode
Setting Range
0: Relative to the central frequency
1: Relative to the maximum frequency
This parameter is used to select the basic value of the swing amplitude.
0: Relative to the central frequency (b0-07 frequency source selection)
Default
0
C3-04 specifies the time percentage of triangular wave rising time to C3-03 (Swing frequency cycle).
Triangular wave rising time = C3-03 (Swing frequency cycle) × C3-04 (Triangular wave rising time coefficient, unit: s)
Triangular wave falling time = C3-03 (Swing frequency cycle) × (1 – C3-04 Triangular wave rising time coefficient ,unit: s)
Code
C3-05
Parameter Name
Set length 0m~65535 m
Setting Range Default
1000 m
C3-06
Actual length 0m~65535 m 0 m
C3-07
Number of pulses per meter
0.1~6553.5 100.0
The above parameters are used for fixed length control.
The length information is collected by DI terminals. C3-06 (Actual length) is calculated by dividing the number of pulses collected by the DI terminal by C3-07 (Number of pulses each meter).
When the actual length C3-06 exceeds the set length in C3-05, the DO terminal set with function “Length reached” becomes ON.
99 100
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
During the fixed length control, the length reset operation can be performed via the DI terminal. For details, see the descriptions of b3-00 to b3-11.
Please set corresponding DI terminal with function 30 (Length count input) in applications. If the pulse frequency is high, DI6 terminal must be used.
Code
C3-08
Parameter Name
Set count value 1~65535
Setting Range Default
1000
C3-09
Designated count value
The count value needs to be collected by DI terminal. Set the corresponding DI terminal with function
28(Counter input) in applications. If the pulse frequency is high, DI6 terminal must be used.
When the counting value reaches the set count value (C3-08), the DO terminal set with function (Set count value reached) becomes ON. Then the counter stops counting.
When the counting value reaches the designated counting value (C3-09), the DO terminal set with function
(Designated count value reached) becomes ON. Then the counter continues to count until the set count value is reached.
5.18 Group d0: Motor 1 Parameters
Code
d0-00 d0-01
Parameter Name
Rated motor power 0.1kw~1000.0 kW
Rated motor voltage 1V~2000 V
Setting Range Default
Model dependent
Model dependent d0-02 Rated motor current
0.01A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power ≤55 kW)
0.1A~6553.5 A (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Model dependent d0-03
Rated motor frequency
0.01 Hz~ maximum frequency 50.00Hz d0-04
Rated motor rotational speed
1rpm~65535rpm
Model dependent
Set the parameters according to the motor nameplate no matter whether V/F control or vector control is adopted.
To achieve better V/F or vector control performance, motor auto-tuning is required. The motor auto-tuning accuracy depends on the correct setting of motor nameplate parameters.
Code
d0-05
Parameter Name
Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor)
Setting Range
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~6.5535 Ω (frequency inverter power ≥75 kW) d0-06 d0-07 d0-08
Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor)
Leakage inductive reactance
(asynchronous motor)
Mutual inductive reactance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~6.5535 Ω (frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.001mH~65.535 mH (frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
0.1mH~6553.5 mH (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Default
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
101
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d0-09
Parameter Name
No-load current
(asynchronous motor)
Setting Range
0.01A ~ d0-02 (Frequency inverter power ≤55 kW)
0.1A to d0-02 (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Default
Model dependent
The parameters in d0-05 ~ d0-09 are asynchronous motor parameters. These parameters are unavailable on the motor nameplate and are obtained by means of motor auto-tuning. Only d0-05 ~ d0-07 can be obtained through static motor auto-tuning. Through complete motor auto-tuning, encoder phase sequence and current loop PI can be obtained besides the parameters in d0-05 ~ d0-09. common standard Y series asynchronous motor.
If it is impossible to perform motor auto-tuning onsite, manually set the values of these parameters according to data provided by the motor manufacturer.
Code
d0-15
Parameter Name
Stator resistance
(synchronous motor)
Setting Range
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~ 6.5535 Ω (frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Default
Model dependent d0-16 d0-17
Shaft D inductance
(synchronous motor)
Shaft Q inductance
(synchronous motor)
0.01 mH ~655.35 mH (frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.001~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
0.01 mH ~655.35 mH (frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.001 mH~65.535 mH (frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Model dependent
Model dependent d0-18
Back EMF
(synchronous motor)
0.1V~6553.5 V
Model dependent
The d0-15~d0-18 are synchronous motor parameters. These parameters are unavailable on the nameplate of most synchronous motors and can be obtained by means of "Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning".
Through "Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning", only the encoder phase sequence and installation angle can be obtained.
Each time "Rated motor power" (d0-00) or "Rated motor voltage" (d0-01) is changed; the frequency inverter will automatically modify the values of d0-15~ d0-18.
You can also directly set the parameters based on the data provided by the synchronous motor manufacturer.
Code
d0-19
Parameter Name
Encoder pulses per revolution
Setting Range Default
1~32767 1024
This parameter is used to set the pulses per revolution (PPR) of ABZ or UVW incremental encoder. In VC mode, the motor cannot run properly if this parameter is set incorrectly.
102
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes 5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d0-20
Parameter Name
Encoder type
Setting Range
0: ABZ incremental encoder
1: Resolver
2: UVW incremental encoder
Default
0
3: Reserved
4: Wire-saving UVW encoder
The EM11 supports multiple types of encoder. Different PG cards are required for different types of encoder. Select the appropriate PG card for the encoder used. Any of the five encoder types is applicable to
Code
d0-29
Parameter Name
Encoder wire-break fault detection time
0.0s: No action
0.1s~10.0s
Setting Range Default
0.0s
This parameter is used to set the detecting time that a wire-break faults. If it is set to 0.0s, the frequency inverter does not detect the encoder wire-break fault. If the duration time of the encoder wire-break fault detected by the frequency inverter exceeds the time set in this parameter, the frequency inverter reports
Err20.
Code
synchronous motor. Only ABZ incremental encoder and resolver are applicable to asynchronous motor.
After installation of the PG card is complete, set this parameter properly based on the actual condition.
Otherwise, the frequency inverter cannot run properly.
Code Parameter Name
d0-21
A/B phase sequence of ABZ incremental encoder
0: Forward
1: Reserve
Setting Range Default
0
This parameter is valid only for ABZ incremental encoder (d0-20 = 0) and is used to set the A/B phase sequence of the ABZ incremental encoder. d0-30
Parameter Name
Motor 1 auto-tuning
0: No auto-tuning
selection
Auto-tuning is prohibited.
Setting Range
0: No auto-tuning
1: Asynchronous motor static auto-tuning
2: Asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning
11: Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning
12: Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning
Default
0
It is valid for both asynchronous motor and synchronous motor. The A/B phase sequence can be obtained through "Asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning" or "Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning".
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d0-22
Encoder installation angle
This parameter is applicable only to synchronous motor. It is valid for ABZ incremental encoder, UVW
1: Asynchronous motor static auto-tuning
It is applicable to scenarios where complete auto-tuning cannot be performed because the asynchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load.
Before performing static auto-tuning, properly set the motor type and motor nameplate parameters of d0-00
~ d0-04 firstly. The frequency inverter will obtain parameters of d0-05 ~ d0-07 by static auto-tuning.
Action guide: Set this parameter to 1, and press RUN key. Then, the frequency inverter starts static
2: Asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning
incremental encoder, resolver and wire-saving UVW encoder, but invalid for SIN/COS encoder.
It can be obtained through synchronous motor no-load auto-turning or with-load auto-tuning. After
To perform this type of auto-tuning, ensure that the motor is disconnected from the load. During the process of complete auto-tuning, the frequency inverter performs static auto-tuning first and then accelerates to 80% installation of the synchronous motor is complete, the value of this parameter must be obtained by motor auto-tuning. Otherwise, the motor cannot run properly.
Code
d0-23
Parameter Name
U, V, W phase sequence of UVW encoder
0: Forward
1: Reverse
Setting Range Default
0 d0-24
UVW encoder angle offset
These two parameters are valid only when the UVW encoder is applied to a synchronous motor. They can of the rated motor frequency within the acceleration time set in b0-21. The frequency inverter keeps running for a certain period and then decelerates to stop with deceleration time set in b0-22.
Before performing complete auto-tuning, properly set the motor type, motor nameplate parameters of b0-00 and d0-00~ d0-04, "Encoder type" (d0-20) and "Encoder pulses per revolution" (d0-19) first.
The frequency inverter will obtain motor parameters of d0-05 ~ d0-09, "A/B phase sequence of ABZ incremental encoder" (d0-21) and vector control current loop PI parameters of d1-10 ~ d1-13 by complete auto-tuning.
Action guide: Set this parameter to 2, and press RUN key. Then, the frequency inverter starts complete auto- tuning. be obtained by synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning or with-load auto-tuning. After installation of the synchronous motor is complete, the values of these two parameters must be obtained by motor auto-tuning.
11: Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning
It is applicable to site where the synchronous motor cannot be disconnected from the load. During with-load auto-tuning, the motor rotates at the speed of 10 RPM.
Otherwise, the motor cannot run properly.
Before performing with-load auto-tuning, properly set the motor type and motor nameplate parameters of
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
b0-00 and d0-00 ~ d0-04 first.
By with-load auto-tuning, the frequency inverter obtains the initial position angle of the synchronous motor, d0-28
Number of pole pairs of resolver
1~99 1 motor after installation, motor auto-tuning must be performed.
If a resolver is applied, set the number of pole pairs properly.
Action guide: Set this parameter to 11, and press RUN key. Then, the frequency inverter starts with-load auto-tuning.
103 104
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes 5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
12: Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning
If the synchronous motor can be disconnected from the load, no-load auto-tuning is recommended, which will achieve better running performance compared with with-load auto-tuning.
During the process of no-load auto-tuning, the frequency inverter performs with-load auto-tuning firstly and then accelerates to 80% of the rated motor frequency with the acceleration time set in b0-21. The frequency inverter keeps running for a certain period and then decelerates to stop with the deceleration time set in b0-22.
Before performing no-load auto-tuning, properly set the motor type, motor nameplate parameters of b0-00 and d0-00 ~ d0-04, "Encoder type" (d0-20) and "Encoder pulses per revolution" (d0-19) and "Number of pole pairs of resolver" (d0-28) first.
The frequency inverter will obtain motor parameters of d0-15 ~ d0-18, encoder related parameters of d0-21
~ d0-24 and vector control current loop PI parameters of d1-10 ~ d1-13 by no-load auto-tuning.
Action guide: Set this parameter to 12, and press RUN key. Then, the frequency inverter starts no-load auto-tuning.
Note: Motor auto-tuning can be performed only in operation panel mode.
Code
d1-05
Parameter Name
Speed loop integral time 2(Ti2)
Setting Range
d1-06
Switchover frequency
2 d1-03~ maximum output frequency
Speed loop PI parameters vary with running frequencies of the frequency inverter.
Default
0.01s~10.00s 1.00s
10.00 Hz
If the running frequency is less than or equal to "Switchover frequency 1" (d1-03), the speed loop PI parameters are d1-01 and d1-02.
If the running frequency is equal to or greater than "Switchover frequency 2" (d1-06), the speed loop PI parameters are d1-04 and d1-05.
If the running frequency is between d1-03 and d1-06, the speed loop PI parameters are obtained from the linear switchover between the two groups of PI parameters, as shown in Diagram 6-30.
5.19 Group d1: Motor 1 vector control parameters
The Group d1 function codes are only valid for motor 1 vector control. It is invalid for motor 2 parameters or motor 1 V/F control.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d1-00
Speed/Torque control selection
0: Speed control
1: Torque control
0
It is used to select the frequency inverter's control mode: speed control or torque control.
The EM11 provides DI terminals with two torque related functions, function 21 (Torque control prohibited)
•
Diagram 5-30 Relationship between running frequencies and PI parameters and function 20 (Speed control/Torque control switchover). The two DI terminals need to be used together with d1-00 to implement speed control/torque control switchover.
If the DI terminal set with function 20 (Speed control/Torque control switchover) is OFF, the control mode is determined by d1-00. If the DI terminal set with function 20 is ON, the control mode is reverse to the value of d1-00.
However, if the DI terminal with function 21 (Torque control prohibited) is ON, the frequency inverter is fixed to run in the speed control mode.
Code
d1-01 d1-02 d1-03 d1-04
Parameter Name
Speed loop proportional gain
1(Kp1)
Speed loop integral time 1(Ti1)
Switchover frequency
1
Speed loop proportional gain
2(KP2)
Setting Range Default
The speed dynamic response characteristics in vector control can be adjusted by setting the proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator.
To achieve a faster system response, increase the proportional gain and reduce the integral time. Be aware that this may lead to system oscillation. The recommended adjustment method is as follows:
If the factory setting cannot meet the requirements, make proper adjustment. Increase the proportional gain first to ensure that the system does not oscillate, and then reduce the integral time to ensure that the system has quick response and small overshoot.
Note: Improper PI parameter setting may cause too large speed overshoot, and overvoltage fault may even occur when the overshoot drops.
0.01~10.00 0.30
0.00 ~ d1-06 5.00 Hz
Code
d1-10 d1-11
0.01~10.00 0.20 d1-12
Parameter Name
Speed loop integral property
Excitation current loop proportional gain
Excitation current loop integral gain
Torque current loop proportional gain
Setting Range
0: Integral separation disabled
1: Integral separation enabled
Default
0
0~30000 2000
0~30000 1300
0~30000 2000
105 106
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes 5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d1-13
Parameter Name
Torque current loop integral gain
Setting Range Default
These are current loop PI parameters for vector control. These parameters are automatically obtained
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
PM field weakening mode of synchronous motor
0: Invalid field weakening
1: Direct calculation
2: Automatic adjustment
Default
1 through "Asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning" or "Synchronous motor no- load auto-tuning", and need not be modified.
Therefore, when current oscillation or torque fluctuation is great, manually decrease the proportional gain or integral gain here. d1-22
PM field weakening depth of synchronous motor
50%~500% 100%
The dimension of the current loop integral regulator is integral gain rather than integral time. Note that too large current loop PI gain may lead to oscillation of the entire control loop.
Code
d1-14 d1-15
Parameter Name
Motor running torque upper limit source in speed control mode
0: d1-16
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
Setting Range
Braking torque upper limit source in speed control mode
5: Communication setting
0: d1-17
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
Default
0
0 d1-23 d1-24 d1-25
Maximum current of
PM field weakening
PM Field weakening automatic adjustment gain
1%~300% 50%
0.10~5.00 1.00
PM Field weakening integral multiple
2~10 2
These parameters are used to set field weakening control for the synchronous motor.
If d1-21 is set to 0, field weakening control on the synchronous motor is disabled. In this case, the maximum rotational speed is related to the frequency inverter DC bus voltage. If the motor's maximum rotational speed cannot meet the requirements, enable the field weakening function to increase the speed.
The EM11 provides two field weakening modes: direct calculation and automatic adjustment.
In direct calculation mode, directly calculate the demagnetized current and manually adjust the demagnetized current by parameter d1-22. The smaller the demagnetized current is, the smaller the total output current is. However, the desired field weakening effect may not be achieved.
In automatic adjustment mode, the best demagnetized current is selected automatically.
This may influence the system dynamic performance or cause instability. d1-16
Digital setting of motor running torque limit
The adjustment speed of the field weakening current can be changed by modifying the values of d1-24 and d1-17
Digital setting of braking torque limit
In the speed control mode, the maximum output torque of the frequency inverter is restricted by d1-14. If the torque upper limit is analog, pulse or communication setting, 100% of the setting corresponds to the value of d1-16, and 100% of the value of d1-16 corresponds to the frequency inverter rated torque.
Parameter Name Setting Range
0: Digital setting (d1-27)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Default
For details on the AI1, AI2 and AI3 setting, see the description of the AI curves. For details on the pulse setting, see the description of b5-00 ~ b5-04. d1-26
Torque setting source in torque control
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
0
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2) d1-18
Motor running slip gain
50%~200% 100%
For SVC, it is used to adjust speed stability accuracy of the motor. When the motor with load runs at a very d1-27 low speed, increase the value of this parameter; when the motor with load runs at a very fast speed, decrease the value of this parameter.
Torque digital setting in torque control
Full range of values 1~7 corresponds to the digital setting of d1-27.
-200.0%~200.0% 100.0%
The d1-26 is used to set the torque setting source. There are a total of eight torque setting sources.
For VC, it is used to adjust the output current of the frequency inverter with same load.
The torque setting is a relative value. 100.0% corresponds to the frequency inverter's rated torque. The setting range is -200.0% ~ 200.0%, indicating the frequency inverter's maximum torque is twice of the frequency inverter's rated torque.
If the torque setting is positive, the frequency inverter rotates in forward direction. If the torque setting is negative, the frequency inverter rotates in reverse direction.
107 108
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes 5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
0: Digital setting (d1-27)
The target torque directly uses the value set in d1-27.
1:AI1
2:AI2
However, in applications requiring rapid torque response, set the acceleration/deceleration time in torque control to 0.00s. For example, two frequency inverters are connected to drive the same load. To balance the load allocation, set one frequency inverter as master in speed control and the other as slave in torque control. The slave receives the master's output torque as the torque command and must follow the master
3:AI3
The target torque is decided by analog input. The EM11 control board provides two AI terminals (AI1, AI2). rapidly. In this case, the acceleration/deceleration time of the slave in torque control is set to 0.0s.
Another AI terminal (AI3) is provided by the I/O extension card. AI1 is 0V~10 V voltage input, AI2 is
0V~10 V voltage input or 4mA~20mA current input decided by jumper on the control board, and AI3 is -10
5.20 Group d2: Motor 1 V/F Control Parameters
V ~ +10 V voltage input.
For the details of AI Curve setting, please refer to the description of analog input parameters.
Group d2 is valid only for V/F control.
The V/F control mode is applicable to low requirement load applications (fan or pump) or applications
When AI is used as frequency setting source, the corresponding value 100% of voltage/ current input corresponds to the value of d1-27. where one frequency inverter operates multiple motors or there is a large difference between the frequency inverter power and the motor power.
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
The target torque is set by DI6 (high-speed pulse). The pulse setting signal specification is 9V~30 V
(voltage range) and 0 kHz~100 kHz (frequency range). The pulse can only be input via DI6. The relationship (which is a two-point line) between DI6 input pulse frequency and the corresponding value is
Code Parameter Name
0: Linear V/F
1: Multi-point V/F
2: Square V/F
3: 1.2-power V/F
Setting Range Default
set in b5-00 ~ b5-03. The corresponding value 100.0% of pulse input corresponds to the percentage of d1-27.
5: Communication setting
d2-00 V/F curve setting 4: 1.4-power V/F
6: 1.6-power V/F
0
The target torque is set by means of communication.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
8: 1.8-power V/F
10: V/F complete separation
11: V/F half separation d1-30
Forward maximum frequency in torque control
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 50.00 Hz d1-31
Reverse maximum frequency in torque 0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13) 50.00 Hz control
The two parameters are used to set the maximum frequency in forward or reverse rotation in torque control
0: Linear V/F
It is applicable to common constant torque load.
1: Multi-point V/F
It is applicable to special load such as dehydrator and centrifuge. Any relationship V/F curve can be obtained by setting parameters of d2-03 ~ d2-08.
2: Square V/F
It is applicable to centrifugal loads such as fan and pump. mode.
In torque control, if the load torque is smaller than the motor output torque, the motor's rotational speed
3 ~ 8: V/F curve between linear V/F and square V/F
10: V/F complete separation
will rise continuously. To avoid runaway of the mechanical system, the motor maximum rotating speed must be limited in torque control.
You can implement continuous change of the maximum frequency in torque control dynamically by controlling the frequency upper limit.
Code Parameter Name
d1-32 d1-33
Acceleration time in torque control
Deceleration time in torque control noise or too large mechanical stress. The setting of acceleration/deceleration time in torque control makes the motor rotational speed change softly.
Setting Range Default
0.00s~120.00s 0.10s
In torque control, the difference between the motor output torque and the load torque determines the speed change rate of the motor and load. The motor rotational speed may change quickly and this will result in
In this mode, the output frequency and output voltage of the frequency inverter are independent. The output frequency is determined by the frequency source, and the output voltage is determined by "Voltage source for V/F separation" (d2-12).
It is applicable to induction heating, inverse power supply and torque motor control.
11: V/F half separation
In this mode, V and F are proportional and the proportional relationship can be set in d2-12. The
Assume that the voltage source input is X (0% ~100%), the relationship between V and F is:
Code
d2-01
V/F = 2 × X × (Rated motor voltage)/ (Rated motor frequency)
Parameter Name
Torque boost
Setting Range
0.0% ( torque auto-boost)
0.1%~30.0%
Default
0
109 110
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-02
Cut-off frequency of torque boost
0.0%~80.0%
Actual cut-off frequency= Motor rated frequency*d2-02
50.0%
To compensate the low frequency torque characteristics of V/F control, you can boost the output voltage of the frequency inverter at low frequency by modifying d2-01.
If the torque boost is set to too large, the motor is easily overheated, and the frequency inverter easily suffers over current.
If the load is large and the motor startup torque is insufficient, increase the value of d2-01. If the load is small, decrease the value of d2-01. If it is set to 0.0, the frequency inverter performs automatic torque boost.
In this case, the frequency inverter automatically calculates the torque boost value based on motor parameters including the stator resistance. d2-02 specifies the frequency under which torque boost is valid. Torque boost becomes invalid when this frequency is exceeded, as shown in the following figure.
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
When d2-00 set to 1, these six parameters are used to define the multi-point V/F curve.
The multi-point V/F curve is set based on the motor's load characteristic. The relationship between voltages and frequencies is: V1 < V2 < V3, F1 < F2 < F3. Diagram 6-32 shows the setting of multi-point V/F curve.
At low frequency, higher voltage may cause motor overheat or even burnt and cause frequency inverter over current stall or over current protection.
Code
d2-03 d2-04 d2-05 d2-06 d2-07 d2-08
Code
d2-09
Diagram 5-32 Setting of multi-point V/F curve
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
V/F slip compensation coefficient
0.0%~200.0% 0.0%
This parameter is valid only for the asynchronous motor.
It can compensate the rotational speed slip of the asynchronous motor when the load of the motor increases,
Parameter Name
Diagram 5-31 Manual torque boost
Setting Range
Multi-point V/F frequency 1 (F1)
0.00 Hz ~ d2-05
Multi-point V/F voltage 1 (V1)
Default
0.00 Hz stabilizing the motor speed in case of load change.
If this parameter is set to 100%, it indicates that the compensation when the motor bears rated load is the rated motor slip. The rated motor slip is automatically obtained by the frequency inverter through calculation based on the rated motor frequency and rated motor rotational speed in group d0.
Generally, if the motor rotational speed is different from the target speed, slightly adjust this parameter.
0.0%~100.0% 0.0%
Code Setting Range Default
d2-03 to d2-07 0.00 Hz d2-10
Parameter Name
V/F oscillation suppression gain
0~100 0
Multi-point V/F frequency 2 (F2)
Multi-point V/F voltage 2 (V2)
Multi-point V/F frequency 3 (F3)
Multi-point V/F voltage 3 (V3)
0.0%~100.0% 0.0% d2-05 ~ maximum frequency 0.00 Hz suppression, to avoid the badly effect for V/F running. When there is no oscillation of the motor, please set the gain to 0. Only when there is obvious oscillation of the motor, you can increase the gain properly. The larger the gain is, more obviously the effect of oscillation suppression is. current must be set correctly, or the effect of oscillation suppression is poor.
111 112
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code
d2-12
Parameter Name
Voltage source for
V/F separation
Setting Range
0: Digital setting (d2-13)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Multi-function
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
Default
0 d2-13
8: Communication setting
(Note: 100.0% corresponds to the rated motor voltage)
Voltage digital setting for V/F separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage 0 V
V/F separation is generally applicable to these sites, such as induction heating, inverse power supply and motor torque control.
If V/F separated control is enabled, the output voltage can be set in d2-13 or by analog, Multi-function, simple PLC, PID or communication. If you set the output voltage by means of non-digital setting, 100% of the setting corresponds to the rated motor voltage. If a negative percentage is set, its absolute value is used as the effective value.
0: Digital setting (d2-13)
The output voltage is set directly in d2-13.
1: AI1;
2: AI2;
3: AI3
The output voltage is set by analog input terminals.
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
The output voltage is set by pulses of the terminal DI6.
Pulse setting specification: voltage range 9V~30 V, frequency range 0kHz~100 kHz
5: Multi-function
6: Simple PLC
If the voltage source is simple PLC mode, parameters in group FC must be set to determine the setting output voltage.
7: PID
The output voltage is generated based on PID closed loop. For details, see the description of PID in group
C0.
8: Communication setting
The output voltage is set by the host computer by means of communication.
The voltage source for V/F separation is selected in the similar way to the frequency source selection. For details, see b0-03 (main frequency source X specification). 100.0% of the setting in each mode corresponds to the rated motor voltage. If the corresponding value is negative, its absolute value is used.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d2-14
Voltage rise time of
V/F separation
0.0s~1000.0s
Note: It indicates the time for the voltage rising from 0 V
~ rated motor voltage.
0.0s d2-14 indicates the time required for the output voltage to rise from 0 V to the rated motor voltage shown
113
5. Description of Function Codes as t1 in the following figure.
EM11 User’s Manual
114
Diagram 5-33 Voltage of V/F separation
5.21 Group d3 to d5: Relevant parameters of motor 2
EM11 series support the switchover of two groups of motor parameters, and the two motors can separately set the motor nameplate parameters, motor auto-tuning parameters, V/F control or vector control mode, the related parameters of encoder and the related performance parameters of V/F control or vector control mode.
For the setting of motor 2, please refer to the relevant description of motor1 parameters.
5.22 Group d6: Control Optimization Parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d6-00 Carrier frequency 0.5kHz~15.0 kHz
Model dependent
It is used to adjust the carrier frequency of the frequency inverter, helping to reduce the motor noise, avoiding the resonance of the mechanical system, and reducing the leakage current to earth and interference generated by the frequency inverter.
If the carrier frequency is low, output current has high harmonic wave, and then the motor will increase power loss and temperature rising.
If the carrier frequency is higher, the power loss and temperature rising of the motor will decline. However, the frequency inverter will have an increasing in power loss, temperature rising and interference.
Adjusting the carrier frequency will exert influences on the aspects listed in the following table.
Table 6-1 Influences of carrier frequency adjustment
Carrier frequency
Low → High
Motor noise
Output current
Motor temperature
Frequency inverter
Leakage current
Large → Small
Bad → Good
High → Low
Low → High
Small → Large
External radiation interference
Small → Large
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
The factory setting of carrier frequency varies with the frequency inverter power. If you need to modify the carrier frequency, note that if the set carrier frequency is higher than factory setting, it will lead to an increase in temperature rise of the frequency inverter's heatsink. In this case, you need to de-rate the frequency inverter. Otherwise, the frequency inverter may overheat and alarm.
Code
d6-01
Parameter Name
DPWM switchover frequency upper limit
0.00Hz~15.00 Hz
Setting Range Default
12.00 Hz
This parameter is valid only for V/F control.
It is used to determine the wave modulation mode in V/F control of asynchronous motor. If the frequency is lower than the value of this parameter, the waveform is 7-segment continuous modulation. If the frequency is higher than the value of this parameter, the waveform is 5-segment intermittent modulation.
The 7-segment continuous modulation causes more wastage of IGBT switches of the frequency inverter but smaller current ripple. The 5-segment intermittent modulation causes less wastage of IGBT switches of the frequency inverter but larger current ripple. This parameter may lead to motor running instability at high frequency. Do not modify this parameter generally.
For instability of V/F control, refer to parameter d2-10. For wastage of frequency inverter and temperature rising, please refer to parameter d6-00.
Code
d6-02
Parameter Name
PWM modulation mode
Setting Range
0: Asynchronous modulation
1: Synchronous modulation
Default
0
This parameter is valid only for V/F control.
Synchronous modulation indicates that the carrier frequency varies linearly with the change of the output frequency, ensuring that the ratio of carrier frequency to output frequency remains unchanged. Synchronous modulation is generally used at high output frequency, which helps improve the output voltage quality.
At low output frequency (100 Hz or lower), synchronous modulation is not required. This is because ratio of carrier frequency to output frequency is still high, and asynchronous modulation is more superior at such low running frequency.
Synchronous modulation takes effect only when the running frequency is higher than 85 Hz. If the frequency is lower than 85 Hz, asynchronous modulation is always valid.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range Default
d6-03
Carrier frequency adjustment with temperature
0: No
1: Yes
1
It is used to set whether the carrier frequency is adjusted based on the temperature. The frequency inverter automatically reduces the carrier frequency when detecting that the heatsink temperature is high. The frequency inverter restores the carrier frequency to the set value when the heatsink temperature becomes normal. This function is used to reduces the overheat alarms.
Code
d6-04
Parameter Name
Random PWM depth
Setting Range
0: Random PWM invalid
1~10: Random PWM carrier frequency depth
Default
0
115
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
The setting of random PWM depth can make the motor shrill noise to soft and reduce the electromagnetic interference to other equipments. If this parameter is set to 0, random PWM is invalid.
Code
d6-05
Parameter Name
Dead zone compensation mode selection
0: No compensation
Setting Range
1: Compensation mode 1
2: Compensation mode 2
Default
1
Generally, you need not modify this parameter. Try to use a different compensation mode only when there is special requirement on the output voltage waveform quality or oscillation occurs on the motor.
For high power frequency inverter, compensation mode 2 is recommended.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
d6-06 SVC mode selection
0: SVC mode 0
1: SVC mode 1
SVC mode 0: Used in the application that high speed stability required.
SVC mode 1: Used in the application that high torque control linearity required.
Default
1
5.23 Group U0: Monitoring Parameters
Group U0 is used to monitor the frequency inverter's running state. You can view the parameter values by using operation panel, convenient for on-site commissioning, or from the host computer by means of communication (address: 0x7000 ~ 0x7044).
U0-00 ~ U0-31 are the monitoring parameters in the running and stop state defined by b9-02 and b9-03.
For more details, see Table 6-1.
Code
U0-00
Parameter Name Display Range
Running frequency 0.00~300.00 Hz (b0-11 = 2)
U0-01
Setting frequency
0.00~3000.0 Hz (b0-11 = 1)
These two parameters display the absolute value of theoretical running frequency and set frequency. For the actual output frequency of the frequency inverter, see U0-19.
Code Parameter Name
U0-02 DC Bus voltage 0.0~3000.0 V
It displays the frequency inverter's DC bus voltage.
Display Range
Code
U0-03
Parameter Name
Output voltage 0V~1140 V
Display Range
It displays the frequency inverter's output voltage in the running state.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
0.00A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power ≤ 55 kW)
U0-04
Output current
0.0A~6553.5 A (Frequency inverter power > 55 kW)
It displays the frequency inverter's output current in the running state.
Code
U0-05
Parameter Name
Output power 0~32767
Display Range
116
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
It displays the frequency inverter's output power in the running state.
Code
U0-06
Parameter Name
Output torque -200.0%~200.0%
Display Range
It displays the frequency inverter's output torque in the running state.
Code
U0-07
Parameter Name
DI state -0~32767
Display Range
It displays the present state of DI terminals. After the value is converted into a binary number, each bit corresponds to a DI. "1" indicates high level signal, and "0" indicates low level signal. The corresponding relationship between bits and DIx is described in the following table.
Bit0 Bit1 Bit2 Bit3 Bit4 Bit5 Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9
DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10
Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit10 Bit11 Bit12 Bit13 Bit14 Bit15
VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI1 VDI2 VDI3 VDI4 VDI5
Code
U0-08
Parameter Name
DO state 0~1023
Display Range
It indicates the present state of DO terminals. After the value is converted into a binary number, each bit corresponds to a DO terminal. "1" indicates high level signal, and "0" indicates low level signal. The corresponding relationship between bits and DOx is described in the following table.
Table 6-15 Corresponding relationship between bits and DOs
Bit5
VDO1
Bit11
Bit0
DO3
Bit1
Relay 1
Bit2
Relay 2
Bit3
DO1
Bit4
DO2
Bit6 Bit7 Bit8 Bit9 Bit10
VDO2 VDO3 VDO4 VDO5
Code
U0-14
Parameter Name
Load speed display 0~65535
For more details, see the description of b9-06.
Code Parameter Name
U0-15 PID setting 0~65535
U0-16
PID feedback 0~65535
They display the PID setting value and PID feedback value.
Display Range
Display Range
PID setting = PID setting (percentage) ×C0-05
PID feedback = PID feedback (percentage) × C0-05
Code Parameter Name
U0-18
Input pulse frequency 0.00kHz ~100.00 kHz
Display Range
It displays the high-speed pulse sampled frequency of DI6, in minimum unit of 0.01 kHz.
Code Parameter Name
U0-19
Feedback speed, unit:0.01Hz
-3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
-300.00Hz~300.00 Hz
It displays the actual output frequency of the frequency inverter.
Display Range
117
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is set to 1, the display range is -3000.00~3000.00 Hz.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is set to 2, the display range is -300.00Hz~300.00 Hz.
Code
U0-20
Parameter Name
Remaining running time
0.0min~6500.0 min
Display Range
It displays the remaining running time when the timing operation is enabled. For details on timing operation, refer to b2-28 ~ b2-30.
Code
U0-21
U0-22
U0-23
Parameter Name
AI1 voltage before correction
AI2 voltage before correction
AI3 voltage before correction
0.00V~10.57 V
0.00V~10.57 V
-10.57V~10.57 V
Display Range
They display the AI sampling voltage actual value. The actually used voltage is obtained after linear correction, which will reduce the deviation between the sampled voltage and the actual input voltage.
For actual corrected voltage, see U0-09, U0-10 and U0-11. Refer to group b8 for the correction mode.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-24 Linear speed 0.0min~65535m/min
It displays the linear speed of the DI6 high-speed pulse sampling. The unit is meter per minute (meter/min).
The linear speed is calculated according to the actual number of pulses sampled per minute and C3-07
(Number of pulses per meter).
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-27
Communication setting value
-100.00%~100.00%
It displays the data written in by means of the communication address 0x1000.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-28
Encoder feedback speed
-300.00Hz~300.00 Hz
-3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
It displays the motor running frequency measured by the encoder.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 1, the display range is -3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 2, the display range is -300.00Hz~300.00 Hz.
Display Range Code Parameter Name
U0-29
Main frequency X
0.00Hz~300.00 Hz
0.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
It displays the setting of main frequency X.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 1, the display range is -3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 2, the display range is -300.00Hz~300.00 Hz.
118
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
Code Parameter Name
U0-30 Auxiliary frequency Y
0.00Hz~300.00 Hz
0.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
Display Range
It displays the setting of auxiliary frequency Y.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 1, the display range is -3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz.
If b0-11 (frequency command resolution) is 2, the display range is -300.00Hz~300.00 Hz.
Code
U0-32
Parameter Name
Synchronous motor rotor position
0.0°~ 359.9°
It displays the rotor position of the synchronous motor.
Display Range
Code
U0-33
Parameter Name
Motor temperature 0°C~200°C
Display Range
It displays the motor temperature obtained by means of AI3 sampling. For the motor temperature detection details, see bb-25.
Code Parameter Name
U0-34 Target torque -200.0%~200.0%
It displays the present torque upper limit value.
Code
U0-35
Parameter Name
Resolver position 0~4095
It displays the current resolver position.
Display Range
Display Range
Code
U0-36
Parameter Name
Power factor angle -
It displays the present power factor angle.
Display Range
Code
U0-37
Parameter Name
ABZ position 0~65535
Display Range
It displays the phase A and B pulse counting of the present ABZ or UVW encoder. This value is four times the number of pulses that the encoder runs. For example, if the display is 4000, the actual number of pulses that the encoder runs is 4000/4 = 1000.
The value increase when the encoder rotates in forward direction and decreases when the encoder rotates in reverse direction. After increasing to 65535, the value starts to increase from 0 again. After decreasing to 0, the value starts to decrease from 65535 again.
You can check whether the installation of the encoder is normal by viewing U0-37.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-38
Target voltage of V/F separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage
U0-39
Output voltage of V/F separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage
They display the target output voltage and present actual output voltage in the V/F separation state. For V/F separation more details, see the descriptions of group d2.
119
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-40
DI input state visual display
-
It displays the DI state visually and the display format is shown in the following figure.
Diagram 5-34 Display format of the DI state
Code
U0-41
Parameter Name
DO output state visual display
-
Display Range
It displays the DO state visually and the display format is shown in the following figure.
Code
U0-42
Diagram 5-35 Display format of the DO state
Parameter Name Display Range
DI function state visual display
-
It displays whether the DI functions 1-40 are valid. The operation panel has five 7-segment LEDs and each
7-segment LED displays the selection of eight functions. The 7-segment LED is defined in the following figure.
Diagram 5-36 Definition of 7-segment LED
The 7-segment LED display functions 1-8, 9-16, 17-24, 25-32 and 33-40 respectively from right to left.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-43
DO function state visual display
-
It displays whether the DO functions 41~59 are valid. The display format is similar to U0-42.
The 7-segment LEDs display functions 41–48, 49–56 and 57–59, respectively from right to left.
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-45
Phase Z signal counting
-
120
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
It displays the phase Z counting of the present ABZ or UVW encoder. The value increases or decreases by
1 every time the encoder rotates a round forwardly or reversely. You can check whether the installation of the encoder is normal by viewing U0-45.
Code
U0-46
Parameter Name
Present setting frequency (%)
-100.00%~100.00%
Display Range
U0-47
Present running frequency (%)
-100.00%~100.00%
It displays the present setting frequency and running frequency. 100.00% corresponds to the frequency inverter's maximum frequency (b0-13).
Code Parameter Name Display Range
U0-48
Frequency inverter running state
0~65535
It displays the running state of the frequency inverter. The data format is listed in the following table:
Bit0
Bit1
0: stop
1: forwarder running
2: reverse running
U0-48
Bit 2
Bit3
0: constant speed
1:acceleration
2:deceleration
Bit 4
Code
U0-49
Parameter Name
Sent value of point-point communication
-100.00%~100.00%
Display Range
U0-50
Received value of point-point
-100.00%~100.00% communication
It displays the data at point-point communication. U0-49 is the data sent by the master, and U0-50 is the data received by the slave.
0:Normal DC bus voltage
1:Low DC bus voltage
5.24 Group A0: System parameters
Code
A0-00
Parameter Name
User password 0~65535
Setting Range Default
0
If it is set to any non-zero number, the password protection function is enabled. After a password has been set and taken effect, you must enter the correct password in order to enter the menu. If the entered password is incorrect you cannot view or modify parameters.
If A0-00 is set to 00000, the previously set user password is cleared, and the password protection function is disabled.
121
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
A0-01
A0-02
Parameter Name
Product number
Software version
Setting Range
Frequency inverter product number
Software version of control board
Default
Model dependent
Model dependent
A0-07
Parameter modification property
0: Modifiable
0
1: Not modifiable
It is used to set whether the parameters are modifiable to avoid mal-function. If it is set to 0, all parameters are modifiable. If it is set to 1, all parameters can only be viewed.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
Unit's digit: User-defined parameter QUICK display selection.
0: Not display
A0-08
Individualized parameter display property
1: Display
Ten's digit: User-changed parameter QUICK display selection.
Default
0
0: Not display
1: Display
The setting of parameter display mode aims to facilitate you to view different types of parameters based on actual requirements.
If one digit of A0-08 is set to 1, you can switch over to different parameter display modes by pressing key
“QUICK”. By default, only the “frequency inverter parameter” display mode is used.
The display codes of different parameter types are shown in the following table.
Table 6-10 Display codes of different parameter types
Parameter Type Display Code
Frequency inverter parameter display -dFLt
User-defined parameter display -user
User-changed parameter display -cHGd
The EM11 provides display of two types of individualized parameters: user-defined parameters and user-modified parameters.
You-defined parameters are included in group “A1”. You can add a maximum of 32 parameters, convenient for commissioning.
In user-defined parameter mode, symbol "u" is added before the function code. For example, b0-00 is displayed as ub0-00.
In “User-changed parameter” mode, symbol "c" is added before the function code. For example, b0-00 is displayed as cb0-00.
The User-changed parameters are grouped together in QUICK menu, which is convenient for on-site troubleshooting.
Code Parameter Name Default
A0-09
Restore default settings
Setting Range
0: No operation
1: Restore default settings except motor parameters and accumulation record.
2: Restore default settings for all parameters
3: Reserve
4: Clear records
Ohter: Reserve
0
122
EM11 User’s Manual 5. Description of Function Codes
0:No operation
1: Restore default settings except motor parameters
If A0-09 is set to 1, most function codes are restored to the default settings except motor parameters, frequency command resolution (b0-11), fault records, accumulative running time (b9-09), accumulative power-on time (b9-08) and accumulative power consumption (b9-10).
2: Restore default settings for all parameters, including motor parameters
3: Restore user backup parameters
If A0-09 is set to 3, the previous backup user parameters are restored (backup by setting A0-09=999).
4: Clear records
If A0-09 is set to 4, the fault records, accumulative power-on time (b9-08), accumulative running time
(b9-09), and accumulative power consumption (b9-10) are cleared.
999: Back up present user parameters
If A0-09 is set to 999, the present parameter settings are backed up, helping you to restore the setting if incorrect parameter setting is performed.
5.25 Group A1: User-Defined Function Codes
Code
A1-00
A1-01
A1-02
A1-03
A1-04
A1-05
A1-06
A1-07
A1-08
A1-09
Parameter Name Setting Range
User-defined function code 0
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 1
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 2
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 3
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 4
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 5
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 6
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 7
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 8
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 9
User visible function codes
A1-10
A1-11
User-defined function code 10
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 11
User visible function codes
A1-12
A1-13
User-defined function code 12
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 13
User visible function codes
A1-14
User-defined function User visible function codes ub1.10 ud2.00
123
Default
ub0.01 ub0.02 ub0.03 ub0.07 ub0.12 ub0.21 ub0.22 ub3.00 ub3.01 ub3.02 ub4.04 ub6.01 ub1.00
5. Description of Function Codes EM11 User’s Manual
Code
A1-15
A1-16
A1-17
A1-18
A1-19
A1-20
A1-21
A1-22
A1-23
Parameter Name
code 14
Setting Range
User-defined function code 15
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 16
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 17
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 18
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 19
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 20
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 21
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 22
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 23
User visible function codes
Default
ud2.01 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00
A1-24
A1-25
A1-26
A1-27
A1-28
A1-29
User-defined function code 24
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 25
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 26
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 27
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 28
User visible function codes
User-defined function code 29
User visible function codes uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00
A1-30
User-defined function code 30
User visible function codes uA0.00
A1-31
User-defined function code 31
User visible function codes uA0.00
Group A1 is user-defined parameter group. You can select the required parameters from all EM11 functions codes and add them into this group, convenient for view and modification.
Group A1 provides a maximum of 32 user-defined parameters. If "A1-00" is displayed, it indicates that group A1 is null. After you enter user-defined function code mode, the displayed parameters are defined by
A1-00~ A1-31 and the sequence is consistent with that in group A1.
124
EM11 User’s Manual 6. EMC(Electromagnetic compatibility)
6. EMC (Electromagnetic compatibility)
6.1 Definition
Electromagnetic compatibility is the ability of the electric equipment to run in the electromagnetic interference environment and implement its function stably without interferences on the electromagnetic environment.
6.2 EMC Standard Description
In accordance with the requirements of the national standard GB/T12668.3, the inverter needs to comply with electromagnetic interference and anti-electromagnetic interference requirements.
The existing products of our company apply the latest international standard—IEC/EN61800-3: 2004
(Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods), which is equivalent to the national standard GB/T12668.3.
IEC/EN61800-3 assesses the inverter in terms of electromagnetic interference and anti-electronic interference. Electromagnetic interference mainly tests the radiation interference, conduction interference and harmonics interference on the inverter (required for the inverter for civil use)Anti-electromagnetic interference mainly tests the conduction interference rejection, radiation interference rejection, surge interference rejection, fast and mutable pulse group interference rejection, ESD interference rejection and power low frequency end interference rejection (specific test items including: 1. Interference rejection tests of input voltage sag, interrupt and change; 2. Phase conversion interference rejection test; 3. Harmonic input interference rejection test; 4. Input frequency change test; 5. Input voltage unbalance test; 6. input voltage fluctuation test).
The tests shall be conducted strictly in accordance with the above requirements of IEC/ EN61800-3, and the products of our company are installed and used according to Section 7.3 and have good electromagnetic compatibility in general industry environment.
6.3 EMC Guide
6.3.1 Harmonic Effect
Higher harmonics of power supply may damage the inverter. Thus, at some places where mains quality is rather poor, it is recommended to install AC input reactor.
6.3.2 Electromagnetic Interference and Installation Precautions
There are two kinds of electromagnetic interferences, one is interference of electromagnetic noise in the surrounding environment on the inverter, and the other is interference of inverter on the surrounding equipment.
Installation precautions:
1) The earth wires of the frequency inverter and other electric products shall be well grounded;
2) The power input and output power cables of the inverter and weak current signal cables (e.g. control line) shall not be arranged in parallel and vertical arrangement is preferable.
3) It is recommended that the output power cables of the inverter employ shield cables or steel pipe shielded cables and that the shielding layer be earthed reliably. The lead cables of the equipment suffering interferences are recommended to employ twisted-pair shielded control cables, and the
125
6. EMC(Electromagnetic compatibility) EM11 User’s Manual shielding layer shall be earthed reliably.
4) When the length of motor cable is longer than 100 meters, it needs to install output filter or reactor.
6.3.3 Handling method for the interferences of the surrounding equipment on the inverter
The electromagnetic interference on the inverter is generated because plenty of relays, contactors and electromagnetic brakes are installed near the inverter. When the inverter has error action due to the interferences, the following measures can be taken:
1) Install surge suppressor on the devices generating interference;
2) Install filter at the input end of the inverter. Refer to Section 7.3.6 for the specific operations.
3) The lead cables of the control signal cable of the inverter and the detection line employ shielded cable and the shielding layer shall be earthed reliably.
6.3.4 Handling method for the interferences of frequency inverter on the surrounding equipment
These interferences include two types: one is radiation interference of the inverter, and the other is conduction interference of the inverter. These two types of interferences cause the surrounding electric equipment to suffer electromagnetic or electrostatic induction. The surrounding equipment hereby produces error action. For different interferences, it can be handled by referring to the following methods:
1) For the measuring meters, receivers and sensors, their signals are generally weak. If they are placed nearby the inverter or together with the inverter in the same control cabinet, they are easy to suffer interference and thus generate error actions. It is recommended to handle with the following methods:
Put in places far away from the interference source; do not arrange the signal cables with the power cables in parallel and never bind them together; both the signal cables and power cables employ shielded cables and are well earthed; install ferrite magnetic ring (with suppressing frequency of 30 to
1,000MHz) at the output side of the inverter and wind it 2 to 3 cycles; install EMC output filter in more severe conditions.
2) When the equipment suffering interferences and the inverter use the same power supply, it may cause conduction interference. If the above methods cannot remove the interference, it shall install EMC filter between the inverter and the power supply (refer to Section 7.3.6 for the prototyping operation); the surrounding equipment is separately earthed, which can avoid the interference caused by the leakage current of the inverter’s earth wire when common earth mode is adopted.
3) The surrounding equipment is separately earthed, which can avoid the interference caused by the leakage current of the inverter’s earth wire when common earth mode is adopted.
6.3.5 Leakage current and handling
There are two forms of leakage current when using the inverter. One is leakage current to the earth, and the other is leakage current between the cables.
1) Factors influencing the leakage current to the earth and the solutions:
There are distributed capacitance between the lead cables and the earth. The larger the distributed capacitance is, the larger the leakage current will be. The distributed capacitance can be reduced by effectively reducing the distance between the inverter and the motor. The higher the carrier frequency is, the larger the leakage current will be. The leakage current can be reduced by reducing the carrier frequency.
However, reducing the carrier frequency may result in addition of motor noise. Note that additional installation of reactor is also an effective method to remove the leakage current.
The leakage current may increase following the addition of circuit current. Therefore, when the motor
126
EM11 User’s Manual 6. EMC(Electromagnetic compatibility) power is high, the corresponding leakage current will be high too.
2) Factors of producing leakage current between the cables and solutions:
There is distributed capacitance between the output cables of the inverter. If the current passing the lines has higher harmonic, it may cause resonance and thus result in leakage current. If thermal relay is used, it may generate error action.
The solution is to reduce the carrier frequency or install output reactor. It is recommended that thermal relay not be installed before the motor when using the inverter, and that electronic over current protection function of the inverter be used instead.
6.3.6 Precautions for Installing EMC input filter at the input end of power supply
1) When using the inverter, please follow its rated values strictly. Since the filter belongs to Classification I electric appliances, the metal enclosure of the filter shall be large and the metal ground of the installing cabinet shall be well earthed and have good conduction continuity. Otherwise there may be danger of electric shock and the EMC effect may be greatly affected.
2) Through the EMC test, it is found that the filter ground must be connected with the PE end of the inverter at the same public earth. Otherwise the EMC effect may be greatly affected.
3) The filter shall be installed at a place close to the input end of the power supply as much as possible.
127
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution EM11 User’s Manual
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution
7.1 Fault Alarm and Countermeasures
EM11 inverter has 35 types of warning information and protection function. In case of abnormal fault, the protection function will be invoked, the inverter will stop output, and the faulty relay contact of the inverter will start, and the fault code will be displayed on the display panel of the inverter. Before consulting the service department, the user can perform self-check according to the prompts of this chapter, analyze the fault cause and find out t solution. If the fault is caused by the reasons as described in the dotted frame, please consult the agents of inverter or our company directly. Among the 35 types of warning information,
Err22 is hardware over current or over voltage signal. In most cases, the hardware over voltage fault will cause Err22 alarm.
Table 7-1 Common faults and solution of the frequency inverter
Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions
Inverter unit protection
Err01
1: The output circuit is grounded or short circuited.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: The connecting cable of the motor is too long.
2: Install a reactor or an output filter.
3: Check the air filter and the
3: The IGBT overheat.
4: The internal connections become loose. cooling fan.
4: Connect all cables properly.
5: Ask for technical support
5: The main control board is faulty.
6: The drive board is faulty.
7: The inverter IGBT is faulty.
6: Ask for technical support
7: Ask for technical support
Over current during acceleration
Err02
1: The output circuit is grounded or short circuited.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: Perform the motor auto- tuning.
2: Motor auto-tuning is not performed.
3: The acceleration time is too short.
3: Increase the acceleration time.
4: Adjust the manual torque boost
4: Manual torque boost or V/F curve is or V/F curve. not appropriate.
5: The voltage is too low.
5: Adjust the voltage to normal range.
6: The startup operation is performed on 6: Select rotational speed tracking the rotating motor. restart or start the motor after it
Over current during deceleration
Err03 acceleration.
8: The frequency inverter model is of too
7: Remove the added load.
8: Select a frequency inverter of small power class. higher power class.
1: The output circuit is grounded or short circuited.
2: Motor auto-tuning is not performed.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3: Increase the deceleration time.
3: The deceleration time is too short.
4: The voltage is too low.
4: Adjust the voltage to normal deceleration.
6: The braking unit and braking resistor are not installed.
5: Remove the added load.
6: Install the braking unit and braking resistor.
128
EM11 User’s Manual 7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution
Fault Name Display
Over current at constant speed
Err04
Possible Causes Solutions
1: The output circuit is grounded or short circuited.
2: Motor auto-tuning is not performed.
3: The voltage is too low.
1: Eliminate external faults.
2: Perform the motor auto-tuning.
3: Adjust the voltage to normal
Overvoltage during acceleration
Err05 operation.
5: The frequency inverter model is of too small power class.
5: Select an Frequency inverter of higher power class.
1: The input voltage is too high. during acceleration.
1: Adjust the voltage to normal range.
2: Cancel the external force or
3: The acceleration time is too short.
4: The braking unit and braking resistor are not installed. install a braking resistor.
3: Increase the acceleration time.
4: Install the braking unit and braking resistor.
Overvoltage during deceleration
Overvoltage at constant speed
Err06
Err07
1: The input voltage is too high.
1: Adjust the voltage to normal during deceleration.
2: Cancel the external force or install the braking resistor.
3: The deceleration time is too short.
4: The braking unit and braking resistor are not installed.
3: Increase the deceleration time.
4: Install the braking unit and braking resistor.
1: The input voltage is too high.
1: Adjust the voltage to normal
Control power supply fault
Low voltage
Frequency inverter overload
Err08
Err09
Err10 during deceleration. install the braking resistor.
The input voltage is not within the allowable range.
Adjust the input voltage to the allowable range.
1: Instantaneous power failure occurs on the input power supply.
2: The frequency inverter's input voltage
1: Reset the fault.
2: Adjust the voltage to normal is not within the allowable range.
3: The DC bus voltage is abnormal. range.
3: Ask for technical support
4: The rectifier bridge and buffer resistor 4: Ask for technical support are faulty.
5: The drive board is faulty.
6: The main control board is faulty.
5: Ask for technical support
6: Ask for technical support
1: The load is too heavy or locked- rotor 1: Reduce the load and check the occurs on the motor. motor and mechanical condition.
2: The frequency inverter model is of too small power class.
2: Select a frequency inverter of higher power class.
Motor overload
Err11
1: bb-01 is set improperly.
2: The load is too heavy or locked- rotor
1: Set bb-01 correctly.
2: Reduce the load and check the occurs on the motor.
3: The frequency inverter model is of too small power class. motor and the mechanical condition.
3: Select a frequency inverter of higher power class.
129
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution EM11 User’s Manual
Fault Name Display Possible Causes Solutions
Power input phase loss
Power output phase loss
IGBT Module overheat
External equipment fault
Err12
Err13
Err14
Err15 abnormal.
2: The drive board is faulty.
3: The lightningproof board is faulty.
4: The main control board is faulty.
2: Ask for technical support.
3: Ask for technical support.
4: Ask for technical support.
1: The cable connecting the frequency inverter and the motor is faulty. 1: Eliminate external faults.
2: The frequency inverter's three-phase outputs are unbalanced when the motor is
2: Check whether the motor three phase winding is normal. running.
3: The drive board is faulty.
4: The IGBT module is faulty.
3: Ask for technical support.
4: Ask for technical support.
1: The ambient temperature is too high.
2: The air filter is blocked.
1: Lower the ambient temperature.
3: The fan is damaged.
4: The thermally sensitive resistor of the
2: Clean the air filter.
3: Replace the damaged fan.
4: Replace the damaged thermally
IGBT module is damaged. damaged. sensitive resistor.
5: Replace the inverter module.
1: External fault signal is input via DI.
2: External fault signal is input via virtual
I/O.
1: Reset the operation.
2: Reset the operation.
Communicati on fault
Contactor fault
Current detection fault
Motor auto-tuning fault
Err16
Err17
Err18
Err19
Encoder fault Err20 state.
2: The communication cable is faulty.
3: The communication extension card is
2: Check the communication cabling. set improperly.
3: Set the communication extension card correctly. group bA are set improperly.
4: Set the communication parameters properly.
1: The drive board and power supply are faulty.
1: Replace the faulty drive board or power supply board.
2: The contactor is faulty. 2: Replace the faulty contactor.
1: The HALL device is faulty.
2: The drive board is faulty. according to the nameplate.
2: The motor auto-tuning times out.
1: Replace the faulty HALL device.
2: Replace the faulty drive board.
1: Set the motor parameters according to the nameplate properly.
2: Check the cable connecting the
Frequency inverter and the motor.
1: The encoder type is incorrect. 1: Set the encoder type correctly
2: The cable connection of the encoder is incorrect. based on the actual situation.
2: Eliminate external faults.
3: The encoder is damaged.
4: The PG card is faulty.
3: Replace the damaged encoder.
4: Replace the faulty PG card.
EEPROM read- write fault
Err21 The EEPROM chip is damaged. Replace the main control board.
130
EM11 User’s Manual 7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution
Fault Name Display
Frequency inverter hardware fault
Short circuit to ground
Accumulative running time reached
Err22
Err23
Err26
1: Overvoltage exists.
2: Over current exists. ground.
Possible Causes Solutions
1: Handle based on over voltage.
2: Handle based on over current.
The accumulative running time reaches Clear the record through parameter the setting value. A0-09
User-defined fault 1
Err27
1: The signal of user-defined fault 1 is input via DI.
2:The signal of user-defined fault 1 is
1: Reset the operation.
2: Reset the operation. input via virtual I/O.
User-defined fault 2
Err28
1: The signal of user-defined fault 2 is input via DI. 1: Reset the operation.
2:The signal of user-defined fault 2 is 2: Reset the operation. input via virtual I/O.
Accumulative power-on time reached
Err29
The accumulative power-on time reaches the setting value.
Clear the record through parameter
A0-09
Off load Err30
The frequency inverter running current is
Check that the load is lower than the setting value. disconnected or the parameter setting is correct.
PID feedback lost during running
Err31 setting of C0-26. set C0-26 to a proper value.
By wave current limiting fault
Err40
1: The load is too heavy or locked- rotor 1: Reduce the load and check the occurs on the motor.
2: The frequency inverter model is of too motor and mechanical condition.
2: Select a frequency inverter of small power class. higher power class.
Motor switchover fault during running
Err41
Change the selection of the motor via terminal during running of the frequency inverter.
Perform motor switchover after the frequency inverter stops.
1: The encoder parameters are set incorrectly.
1: Set the encoder parameters properly.
Too large speed deviation
Err42 performed.
3: The detection parameters of too large speed deviation are set incorrectly.
3: Set the detection parameters correctly based on the actual situation.
Motor over-speed
Err43
1: The encoder parameters are set incorrectly.
1: Set the encoder parameters properly. performed.
3: The over-speed detection parameters parameters correctly based on the are set incorrectly.
3: Set the over-speed detection actual situation.
131
7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution EM11 User’s Manual
Fault Name Display
Motor overheat
Initial position fault
Err45
Err51
Possible Causes Solutions
1: Check the temperature sensor
1: The cabling of the temperature sensor cabling and eliminate the cabling becomes loose. fault.
2: The motor temperature is too high.
2: Lower the carrier frequency or adopt other heat radiation measures
1: Check that the motor parameters
1: The motor parameters are not too deviation based on the actual situation. are set correctly and whether the setting of rated current is too small.
7.2 Common Faults and Solutions
You may come across the following faults during the use of the frequency inverter. Refer to the following table for simple fault analysis.
SN
1
2
3
4
Table 8-2 Troubleshooting to common faults of the frequency inverter
Fault Possible Causes
1: There is no power supply to the frequency inverter or the power input to the frequency inverter is too low.
2: The power supply of the switch on the
There is no display at power-on. drive board of the frequency inverter is faulty.
3: The rectifier bridge is damaged.
4: The control board or the operation panel is faulty.
5: The cable connecting the control board and the drive board and the operation panel loose or breaks.
1: The cable between the drive board and
“-coc-” is displayed at power-on. the control board is in poor contact.
2: Related components on the control board are damaged.
3: The motor or the motor cable is short circuited to the ground.
4: The HALL device is faulty.
5: The power input to the frequency inverter is too low.
Solutions
1: Check the power supply.
2: Check the DC bus voltage.
3:Check the internal wiring plug
4: Change a keypad
5: Ask for technical support.
1: Checking wiring
2: Ask for technical support.
“Err23” is displayed at power-on.
1: The motor or the motor output cable is short-circuited to the ground.
2: The frequency inverter is damaged.
1: Measure the insulation of the motor and the output cable with a megger.
2: Ask for technical support.
The frequency inverter display is normal after power-on. But
“coc-” is displayed after running and stops immediately.
1: The cooling fan is damaged or locked-rotor occurs.
2: The external control terminal cable is short circuited.
1: Replace the damaged fan.
2: Eliminate external fault.
132
EM11 User’s Manual 7. Fault Diagnosis and Solution
SN
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Fault
Err14 ( IGBT module overheat) fault is reported frequently.
Possible Causes
1: The setting of carrier frequency is too high.
2: The cooling fan is damaged, or the air filter is blocked.
3: Components inside the frequency inverter are damaged (thermal coupler or others).
Solutions
1: Reduce the carrier frequency
(d6-00).
2: Replace the fan and clean the air filter.
3: Ask for technical support.
The motor does not rotate after the frequency inverter runs.
The DI terminals are disabled.
1: Check the motor and the motor cables.
2: The frequency inverter parameters are set improperly (motor parameters).
3: The cable between the drive board and the control board is in poor contact.
4: The drive board is faulty.
1: Ensure the cable between the
Frequency inverter and the motor is normal.
2: Replace the motor or clear mechanical faults.
3: Check and re-set motor parameters.
1: The parameters are set incorrectly.
2: The external signal is incorrect.
3: The jumper bar across OP and+24 V becomes loose.
4: The control board is faulty.
1: Check and reset the parameters in group F4.
2: Re-connect the external signal cables.
3: Re-confirm the jumper bar across OP and +24 V.
4: Ask for technical support.
The motor speed is always low in VC mode.
1: The encoder is faulty.
2: The encoder cable is connected incorrectly or in poor contact.
3: The PG card is faulty.
4: The drive board is faulty.
1: Replace the encoder and ensure the cabling is proper.
2: Replace the PG card.
3: Ask for technical support.
The frequency inverter reports over current and overvoltage frequently.
Err17 is reported of power-on or running.
1: The motor parameters are set improperly.
2: The acceleration/deceleration time is improper.
3: The load fluctuates.
The soft startup contactor is not sucked up.
1: Re-set motor parameters or re-perform the motor auto- tuning.
2: Set proper acceleration/ deceleration time.
3: Ask for technical support.
1: Check whether the contactor cable is loose.
2: Check whether the contactor is faulty.
3: Check whether 24 V power supply of the contactor is faulty.
4: Ask for technical support.
is displayed
Related component on the control board is of power-on. damaged.
Replace the control board.
133
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
Appendix I. Modbus communication protocol
EM11series of inverter provides RS485 communication interface, and adopts MODBUS communication protocol. User can carry out centralized monitoring through PC/PLC to get operating requirements. And user can set the running command, modify or read the function codes, the working state or fault information of frequency inverter by Modbus communication protocol.
I. About Protocol
This serial communication protocol defines the transmission information and use format in the series communication and it includes master-polling (or broadcasting) format, master coding method and the content includes function code of action, transferring data and error checking. The response of slave is the same structure, and it includes action confirmation, returning the data and error checking etc. If slave takes place the error while it is receiving the information or cannot finish the action demanded by master, it will send one fault signal to master as a response.
II. Application Methods
The frequency inverter will be connected into a “Single-master Multi-slave” PC/PLC control net with
RS485 bus as the communication slave.
III. Bus structure
1) Hardware interface.
The “485+” and “485-“terminals on frequency inverter are the communication interfaces of Modbus
2) Topological mode
It is a “Single-master Multi-slave” system. In this network, every communication machine has a unique slave address. One of them is as “master” (usually PC host machine, PLC and HMI, etc.), actively sends out the communication, to read or write the parameters of slave. Other machines will be used as slave and response to the inquiry/command from master. At one time only one machine can send the data and other machines are in the receiving status. The setup range of slave address is 0 to 247. Zero refers to broadcast communication address. The address of slave must is exclusive in the network.
3) Transmission mode
There provide asynchronous series and half-duplex transmission mode. In the series asynchronous communication, the data is sent out frame by frame in the form of message. According to the Modbus-RTU protocol, when the free time of no transmission in communication data lines is more than the transmission time of 3.5byte, it indicates that a new start of communication frame.
EM11 series inverter has built-in the Modbus-RTU communication protocol, and is applicable to response the slave “Inquiry/command” or doing the action according to the master’s “Inquiry / Command” and
134
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix I response to the data.
Here, master is personnel computer (PC), industrial machine or programmable logical controller (PLC), and the slave is inverter. Master not only visits some slave, but also sends the broadcast information to all the slaves. For the single master “Inquiry/Command”, all of slaves will return a signal that is a response; for the broadcast information provided by master, slave needs not feedback a response to master machine.
Communication data structure
Modbus protocol communication data format of EM11 series inverter is shown as following. The inverter only support the reading and writing of Word type parameters, the corresponding reading operation command is “0x03”, the writing operation command is “0x06”. The writing and reading operation of byte or bit is not supported.
In theory, the host computer can continuously read several function codes once (that is, the maximum value of “n” is 12), but note that not to jump across the last function code in this function group to avoid the wrong reply.
135
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
If the wrong communication frame was detected by the salve or other reasons caused the failure of reading and writing, the wrong frame will be replied.
RTU frame format
Frame start (START)
More than the 3.5- character time
Slave address(ADR)
Communication address:1 to 247(0: broadcast address)
03: Read slave parameters
Command code(CMD)
Function code address(H)
06: Write slave parameters
It indicates the external parameter address of frequency inverter in hexadecimal format;
Function code address(L)
There are functional code or non-functional code (such as running state parameter/ running command parameters) type parameters, for details see the address definition.
During the transmission, high bit is put in the front, and low bit is at the
Number of function code(H)
Number of function code(L)
back.
It indicates the number of function code ready by the frame. If it is “1”, then it indicates that it reads one function code. During the transmission, high bit is put in the front, and low bit is at the back.
Only one function code can be modified at one time without the field.
136
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix I
Data(H)
Data(L)
END
CRC Checking
It indicates the replying data or the data waiting to write-in. During the transmission, high bit is put in the front, and low bit is at the back.
3.5- character time
In RTU mode, messages include an error-checking field that is based on a CRC method. The CRC field checks the contents of the entire message. The CRC field is two bytes, containing a16-bit binary value. The
CRC value is calculated by the transmitting device, which appends the CRC to the message. The receiving device recalculates a CRC during receipt of the message, and compares the calculated value to the actual value it received in the CRC field.
If the two values are not equal, that means transmission is error
The CRC is started by 0xFFFF.Then a process begins of applying successive eight-bit bytes of the message to the current contents of the register. Only the eight bits of data in each character are used for generating the CRC. Start and stop bits, and the parity bit, do not apply to the CRC. During generation of the CRC, each eight-bit character is exclusive ORed with the register contents. Then the result is shifted in the direction of the least significant bit (LSB), with a zero filled into the most significant bit (MSB) position.
The LSB is extracted and examined. If the LSB was a 1, the register is then exclusive ORed with a preset, fixed value. If the LSB was a 0, no exclusive OR takes place. This process is repeated until eight shifts have been performed. After the last (eighth) shift, the next eight-bit byte is exclusive ORed with the register's current value, and the process repeats for eight more shifts as described above. The final contents of the register, after all the bytes of the message have been applied, is the CRC value.
When the CRC is appended to the message, the low-order byte is appended first, followed by the high-order byte. unsigned int crc_chk_value(unsigned char *data_value,unsigned char length
{ unsigned int crc_value=0xFFFF; int i; while(length--)
{ crc_value^=*data_value++; for(i=0;i<8;i++)
{ if(crc_value&0x0001)
{ crc_value=(crc_value>>1)^0xa001;
} else
{ crc_value=crc_value>>1;
}
}
} return(crc_value);
}
137
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
Definition of communication parameter address
Read and write function-code parameters (Some functional code is not changed, only for the manufacturer use.)
The group number and mark of function code is the parameter address for indicating the rules.
High level bytes: Group A0~AF(GroupA0-A2/ Groupb0-bC), Groupb0-bF(Group C0-C6/Groupd0-d6),
70-7F(Group U)
Low level bytes: 00 to FF
For example: b0-03, address indicates to 0xA303.
Note: Group U: Only for reading parameter, cannot be changed parameters, some parameters cannot be changed during operation, some parameters regardless of what kind of state the inverter in, the parameters cannot be changed. Change the function code parameters, pay attention to the scope of the parameters, units, and relative instructions.
Function code group
A0~ A2
Communication inquiry address
0xA000~ 0xA2FF
Inquiry address When
Communication modifies RAM
0x4000~ 0x42FF b0~bC
C0~C6
0xA300~ 0xAFFF
0xb000~ 0xB7FF
0x4300~ 0x4FFF
0x5000~ 0x57FF
Besides, due to EEPROM be frequently stored, it will reduce the lifetime of EEPROM. In the communication mode, and some function codes don’t have to be stored as long as change the RAM value.
Stop/start parameter
Parameter address
Parameter description
1000
Communication set value(-10000 ~
10000)(Decimal)
Parameter address
1010
Parameter description
PID setting
1001
1002
1003
Running frequency
DC Bus voltage
Output voltage
1011 PID feedback
1012 PLC process
1013 Pulse input frequency, unit: 0.01KHz
1005
Output power
1015
Remaining running time
1006
1007
1008
1009
100A
100B
100C
100D
100E
100F
Output torque
Running speed
DI input terminal
DO output terminal
AI1 voltage
AI2 voltage
AI3 voltage
Counting value input
Length value input
Load speed
1016
1017
1018
1019
101A
101B
101C
101D
101E
101F
1020
Voltage before AI1correction
Voltage before AI2correction
Voltage before AI3correction
Linear speed
Present power-on time
Present running time
Pulse input frequency, unit:1Hz
Communication setting value
Actual feedback speed
Main frequency X display
Auxiliary frequency Y display
Note: Communication setting value is the percentage of relative value, 10000 corresponds to 100%, -10000 correspond to -100.00%.
138
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix I
Control command input frequency inverter: (write in only)
Command word address Command function
0001: Forward running
2000
0002: Reverse running
0003: Forward jog
0004: Reverse jog
0005: Free stop
0006:Decelarating stop
0007: Fault reset
Read inverter status: (read only)
Command word address
3000
Command function
0001: Forward running
0002: Reverse running
0003: Stop
Parameter locking password collation: (If the feedback is the 8888H, it indicates the password collation passed)
Password address Contents of input password
1F00 *****
Digital output terminal control: (write in only)
Address Of locking password command Contents of locking password command
BIT0: DO1 output control
BIT1: DO2 output control
2001
BIT2: Relay 1 output control
BIT3: Relay 2 output control
BIT4: FMR output control
BIT5: VDO1
BIT6: VDO2
BIT7: VDO3
BIT8: VDO4
BIT9: VDO5
Analog output AO1 control: (write in only)
Command word address
2002
Analog output AO2 control: (write in only)
Command word address
2003
Command function
0~7FFF indicates 0%~100%
Command function
0~7FFF indicates 0%~100%
139
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
Pulse output control: (write in only)
Command word address
2004
Command function
0~7FFF indicates 0%~100%
Inverter fault description:
Inverter fault description
Inverter fault information
0000: No fault
0001: Reserved
0002: acceleration over current
0003: deceleration over current
0004: Constant speed over current
0005: acceleration over voltage
0006: deceleration over voltage
0007:Constant speed over voltage
0008: Buffer resistor fault
0015: EEPROM read-write in fault
0016: Frequency inverter hardware fault
0017: Short circuit to ground fault
0018: Reversed
0019: Reversed
001A: Accumulative running time reached
001B: User-defined fault 1
001C: User-defined fault 2
8000
0009: less voltage fault
000A:Frequency inverter overload
000B: Motor overload
000C: Input phase failure
000D: Output phase failure
000E: IGBT overheat
000F: External equipment fault
0010: Communication fault
0011: Contactor fault
0012: Current detection fault
0013: Motor auto-tuning fault
0014: Encoder/PG fault
001D: Accumulative power-on time reached
001E: Off load
001F: PID lost during running
0028: fast current limit fault
0029: Motor switchover fault during running
002A: Too large speed deviation
002B: Motor over-speed
002D: Motor overheat
005A: Encode lines setting fault
005B: Not connect to the encoder
005C: Initial location fault
005E: Speed feedback fault
Group bA Communication parameters
Code Parameter Name
bA-00
Communication type selection
0: Modbus protocol
Setting Range Default
0
The EM11 now supports Modbus, later will add the communication protocol such as PROFIBUS-DP and
CANopen protocol. For details, see the description of “EM11 communication protocol”.
140
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix I
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
Unit's digit: Modbus baud ratio.
0: 300 BPS
1: 600 BPS
2: 1200 BPS
Default
bA-01 Baud ratio setting 3: 2400 BPS
4: 4800 BPS
5: 9600 BPS
6: 19200 BPS
5
7: 38400 BPS
This parameter is used to set the data transfer rate from host computer and the frequency inverter. Please note that baud ratio of the host computer and the inverter should be consistent. Otherwise, the communication is impossible. The higher the baud ratio is, the faster the communication is.
Code
bA-02
Parameter Name
Modbus Data format
Setting Range
0: No check, data format <8,N,2>
1: Even parity check, data format<8,E,1>
2: Odd Parity check, data format<8,O,1>
3: No check, data format <8,N,1>
Valid for Modbus
Default
0
The host computer and frequency inverter setup data format must be consistent, otherwise, communication is impossible.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
0~247 (0: Broadcast address)
Default
bA-03 Broadcast address
0 is broadcast address
1
When the local address is set to 0, that is, broadcast address, it can realize the broadcast function of host computer.
Code
bA-04
Parameter Name
Modbus response time
Setting Range
0~20 ms
Only valid for Modbus
Default
2 ms
Response delay time: it refers to the interval time from the inverter finishes receiving data to sending data to the host machine. If the response time is less than the system processing time, then the response delay time is based on the time delay of the system processing time. If the response delay time is more than the system processing time, after the system processes the data, it should be delayed to wait until the response delay time is reached, then sending data back to host machine.
Code Parameter Name Setting Range
bA-05
Communication timeout
0.0s:invalid
0.1s~60.0s
Valid for Modbus
When the function is set to 0.0s, the communication interface timeout parameter is invalid.
Default
0.0s
When the function code is set to time value, if the interval time between the communication and the next communication is beyond the communication timeout, the system will report communication failure error
(Err16). At normal circumstances, it will be set as invalid. If in the continuous communication system, set this parameter, you can monitor the communication status.
141
Appendix I EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bA-06
Parameter Name
Modbus protocol data transmission format selection
Setting Range
Unit's digit: Modbus protocol.
0: Non-standard Modbus protocol
1: Standard Modbus protocol bA-06=1: Select standard Modbus protocol.
Default
1 bA-06=0: When reading the command, the slave machine return is one byte more than the standard
Modbus protocol’s, for details, refer to communication data structure of this protocol.
Code
bA-07
Parameter Name
Communication reading current resolution
0: 0.01A
1: 0.1A
Setting Range
It is used to confirm the unit of current value when the communication reads the output current.
Default
0
142
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
Appendix II. Function Code Table
If A0-00 is set to a non-zero number, parameter protection is enabled. You must write in correct user password to enter the menu.
To cancel the password protection function, enter with password and set A0-00 to 0.
The user defined fast menu can directly enter without password.
Group “A” is frequency inverter system parameter. Group “b” is basic function parameters. Group “C” is application parameter, Group “d” is control parameter, and Group “U” is monitoring function parameters.
The symbols in the function code table are described as follows:
"☆": The parameter can be modified when the frequency inverter is in stop or running state.
"★": The parameter cannot be modified when the frequency inverter is in running state.
"●": The parameter is the actually measured value and cannot be modified.
"*": The parameter is factory parameter and can be modified only by the manufacturer.
Standard Function Parameters
Code Parameter Name Setting range
Group b0: Basic Function Parameters
Default Property
b0-00 Motor type selection
Unit’s digit: Motor 1 selection
Ten’s digit: Motor 2 selection
0: AC asynchronous motor
1: Permanent magnetic synchronous motor
00 ★
Unit's digit: Motor 1 control mode selection.
Ten's digit: Motor 2 control mode selection.
0: Sensor-less vector control (SVC)
1: Closed-loop vector control (VC)
00000 ★ b0-02 b0-03
Hundred’s digit/Thousand’s digit: reserved
Ten thousand’s digit: Motor selection
0: Motor 1
1: Motor 2
Command source selection
Main frequency source
X selection
0: Keypad control (LED off)
1: Terminal control (LED on)
2: Communication control (LED blinking)
0: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, no-record after power off)
1: Digital setting (Preset frequency b0-12,
UP/DOWN modifiable, record after power off)
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7:Built-in PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
0
0
★
★
143
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b0-04 b0-05 b0-06 b0-07 b0-08 b0-09 b0-10
Parameter Name
Auxiliary frequency source Y selection
Selection of auxiliary frequency Y range
Range of auxiliary frequency Y
Setting range
The same as b0-03 (Main frequency source
X selection)
0: Relative to maximum frequency
1: Relative to main frequency X
Frequency source selection
Unit's digit: Frequency source selection.
0: Main frequency source X
1: X and Y calculation (calculation result determined by ten's digit)
2: Switchover between X and Y
3: Switchover between X and "X and Y calculation"
4: Switchover between Y and "X and Y calculation"
Ten's digit: X and Y calculation relationship
0: X+Y
1: X-Y
2: Maximum of them
3: Minimum of them
Frequency offset of auxiliary frequency source of X and Y
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13)
Binding command source to frequency source
Unit's digit: Binding keypad command to following frequency source.
0: No binding
1: Frequency source by digital setting
2: AI1
3: AI2
4: AI3
5: Pulse setting (DI6)
6: Multi-function
7: Simple PLC
8: PID
9: Communication setting
Ten's digit: Binding terminal command to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
Hundred's digit: Binding communication command to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
Thousand’s digit: Automatically running binding to frequency source.
0~9, same as unit's digit
Record of digital setting
0: not record frequency of power failure
1:record
Default Property
1
★
0
0
0.00 Hz
0
1
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
144
Code Parameter Name
EM11 User’s Manual
Setting range
b0-12 Preset frequency 0.00 ~ maximum frequency (b0-13) b0-13 Maximum frequency 50.00~3000.00 Hz
0: Set by (b0-15) b0-14
Source of frequency upper limit
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3 b0-15 Frequency upper limit
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
Frequency lower limit (b0-17) ~ maximum frequency (b0-13) b0-16
Frequency upper limit offset
0.00 Hz~ maximum frequency(b0-13) b0-17 Frequency lower limit 0.00 Hz ~frequency upper limit(b0-15)
Appendix II
Default Property
2
☆
50.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
☆
☆
0
50.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆ b0-19 b0-20 b0-21
Base frequency for UP/
DOWN modification during running
0: Running frequency
1: Setting frequency
Acceleration/Decelerati on mode
Acceleration time 1
0: Linear acceleration/ deceleration
1: S-curve acceleration/deceleration A
2: S-curve acceleration/deceleration B
0.00s~650.00s (b0-25 = 2)
0.0s~6500.0s (b0-25 = 1)
0s~65000s (b0-25 = 0) b0-22 b0-23 b0-24 b0-25 b0-26
Deceleration time 1
0.00s~650.00s (b0-25 = 2)
0.0s~6500.0s (b0-25 = 1)
0s~65000s (b0-25 = 0)
Time proportion of
S-curve start segment
Time proportion of
S-curve end segment
0.0% ~ (100.0% minus b0-24)
0.0% ~ (100.0% minus b0-23)
Acceleration/Decelerati on time unit
0:1s
1: 0.1s
2: 0.01s
Acceleration/Decelerati on time base frequency
0: Maximum frequency (b0-13)
1: Set frequency
2: 100 Hz
Group b1: Start and Stop Control Parameters
0: Direct start
0
0
Model dependent
Model dependent
30.0%
30.0%
1
0
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
★
0 ★ b1-01
Rotational speed tracking mode motor)
0: From frequency at stop
1: From zero speed
2: From maximum frequency
0 ★
145
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b1-02 b1-03 b1-04 b1-05 b1-06
Parameter Name
Rotational speed tracking speed
Startup frequency 0.00~10.00 Hz
Setting range
Startup frequency holding time
Startup DC braking current/ Pre-excited current
Startup DC braking time/ Pre-excited time b1-08 b1-09 b1-10
DC braking initial frequency of stopping
DC braking waiting time of stopping
DC braking current of stopping
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency b1-11
DC braking time of stopping
Group b2: Auxiliary Function
b2-00 JOG running frequency 0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency b2-02 JOG deceleration time 0.0s~6500.0s b2-03 Acceleration time 2 0.0s~6500.0s b2-04 Deceleration time 2 0.0s~6500.0s b2-05 Acceleration time 3 0.0s~6500.0s b2-06 Deceleration time 3 0.0s~6500.0s b2-07 Acceleration time 4 0.0s~6500.0s b2-08 Deceleration time 4 0.0s~6500.0s b2-09 b2-10 b2-11 b2-12
Jump frequency 1
Jump frequency 2
0.00 Hz ~maximum frequency
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
Frequency jump amplitude
Jump frequency during acceleration/ deceleration
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default
0.00 Hz
0
0.00 Hz
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
6.00 Hz
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00Hz
0.00Hz
146
EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b2-13 b2-14
Parameter Name
Frequency switchover point between acceleration time 1 and
Setting range
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency acceleration time 2
Frequency switchover point between deceleration time 1 and deceleration time 2
0.00 ~ maximum frequency
Default
0.00 Hz
Appendix II
Property
☆
0.00 Hz
☆
0
☆ b2-16 b2-17 b2-18 b2-19 b2-20 b2-21 b2-22 b2-23 b2-24 b2-25
Forward/Reverse rotation dead-zone time
Running mode when set 0: Run at frequency lower limit frequency lower than frequency lower limit
Droop control
1: Stop
2: Run at zero speed
0.00Hz~10.00 Hz
Terminal JOG priority
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Setting power-on time reach threshold
Setting running time reach threshold
Action after running time reached
Cooling fan control
0~65000 h
0~65000 h
0: Continue to run
1: Stop
0: Fan working during running
1: Fan working during power on
Dormant frequency 0.00Hz ~wakeup frequency (b2-26)
Dormant delay time 0.0s~6000.0s
0
0.00 Hz
0
0 h
0 h
0 ☆
0
0.00 Hz
0.0s
0.00 Hz
0.0s ☆
0
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆ b2-30 b2-31
0: b2-30
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
(100% of analog input corresponds to the value of b2-30)
Timing duration 0.0min~6500.0 min
This time running time reached threshold
0.0min~6500.0 min
Group b3: Switch Input Terminal Parameters
0
☆
0.0 min
0.0 min
0
☆
☆
☆
147
Appendix II
Code
b3-05 b3-06 b3-07
EM11 User’s Manual
Parameter Name
DI6/HDI function selection
DI7 function selection(extend)
DI8 function selection(extend)
0: No function
Setting range
1: Forward RUN (FWD) or running command
2: Reverse RUN (REV) or FWD/REV running direction
3: Three-line control
4: Forward JOG (FJOG)
5: Reverse JOG (RJOG)
6: Multi-function terminal 1
7: Multi-function terminal 2
8: Multi-function terminal 3
9: Multi-function terminal 4
10: Terminal UP
11: Terminal DOWN
12: clear to zero of UP and DOWN setting
(terminal, keypad)
13: Terminal 1 for acceleration/ deceleration time selection
14: Terminal 2 for acceleration/ deceleration time selection
15: Frequency source switchover
16: Switchover between main frequency source X and preset frequency
17: Switchover between auxiliary frequency source Y and preset frequency
18:Terminal 1 for Command source switchover
19: Terminal 2 for Command source switchover
20: Speed control/Torque control switchover
21: Torque control prohibited
22: PID pause
23: PID integral pause
24: Reverse PID action direction
25: PID parameter switchover
26: PLC status reset
27: Swing pause
28: Counter input
29: Counter reset
30: Length count input
31: Length reset
32: Pulse input (enabled only for HDI)
33: Frequency modification enable
34:Acceleration/Deceleration prohibited
35: Motor selection terminal 1
36: Motor selection terminal 2(reserve)
37: Fault reset
Default Property
1
4
9
12
13
32
0
0
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
148
Code
b3-08 b3-09 b3-10 b3-11
EM11 User’s Manual
Parameter Name
DI9 function selection(extend)
DI10 function selection(extend)
DI11 function selection(extend)
(extend)
DI12 function selection(extend)
Setting range
38: Normally open (NO) input of external fault
39: Normally closed (NC) input of external fault
40: User-defined fault 1
41: User-defined fault 2
42: Running pause
43: Free stop
44: Emergency stop
45: External STOP terminal 1
46: External STOP terminal 2
47: Deceleration DC braking
48: Immediate DC braking
49: Clear the current running time b3-13
Terminal command mode
0: Two-line mode 1
1: Two-line mode 2
2: Three-line mode 1
3: Three-line mode 2 b3-14
Terminal UP/DOWN rate
0.001Hz/s~65.535 Hz/s b3-15 DI1 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-16 DI1 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-17 DI2 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-18 DI2 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-19 DI3 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-20 DI3 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-21 DI4 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-22 DI4 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-23 DI5 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-24 DI5 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b3-25 DI valid selection 1
Unit's digit: DI1 valid mode.
0: Low level valid
1: High level valid
Ten's digit: DI2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Hundred's digit: DI3 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Thousand's digit: DI4 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten thousand's digit: DI5 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Appendix II
Default Property
0
0
0
0
0
0.100 Hz/s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
00000
★
★
★
★
0.010s ☆
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
★
149
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b3-26
Parameter Name
DI valid selection 2
Setting range
Unit's digit: DI6 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten's digit: DI7 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Hundred's digit: DI8 state.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Thousand's digit: DI9 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten thousand's digit: DI10 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1) b3-27 b4-00 b4-01 b4-02
DI valid selection 3
FMR function (open- collector output terminal)
Relay 1 function
(TA-TB-TC)
Unit's digit: DI11 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Ten's digit: DI12 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as DI1)
Group b4: Switch Signal output Terminals
FM terminal output mode
0: Pulse output (FMP)
1: Switch signal output (FMR)
0: No output
1: Ready signal
2: Frequency inverter running
3: Fault output (free stop fault)
4: Fault output (free stop fault, but do not output when lower voltage)
5: Swing frequency limit
6: Torque limit
7: Frequency upper limit reached
8:Frequency lower limit reached (relevant to running)
9: Frequency lower limit reached (having output at stop)
10: Reverse running
Default Property
00000
00
1
0
2
★
★
☆
☆
☆
☆ b4-04
DO1 function selection
(open-collector output terminal)
12: Zero-speed running 2 (having output at stop)
13: Preset count value reached
14: Designated count value reached
15: Length reached
16: PLC cycle complete
17: Frequency-level detection FDT1 output
18: Frequency level detection FDT2 output
19: Frequency reached
20: Frequency 1 reached
21: Frequency 2 reached
22: Current 1 reached
23: Current 2 reached
24: Module temperature reached
25: Timing reached
1
0
☆
☆
150
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
Code Parameter Name Setting range
26: Zero current state
27: Output current exceeded limitation
28: Lower voltage state output
29: Frequency inverter overload pre-warning
30: Motor overheat pre-warning
31: Motor overload pre-warning
32: off load
33: AI1 larger than AI2
34: AI1 input exceeded limitation
35: Alarm output (all faults)
36: Present running time reached
37: Accumulative power-on time reached
38: Accumulative running time reached b4-10 FMR ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b4-11 FMR OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b4-12 Relay 1 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b4-13 Relay 1 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b4-16 DO1 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b4-17 DO1 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b4-18 DO2 ON delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b4-19 DO2 OFF delay time 0.0s~3000.0s b4-20 DO logic selection 1
Unit's digit: FMR valid mode.
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Ten's digit: Relay 1 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Hundred's digit: Relay 2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Thousand's digit: DO1 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Ten thousand's digit: DO2 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR) b4-21 DO logic selection 2
Unit's digit: DO3 valid mode.
0: Positive logic
1: Negative logic
Ten's digit: D04 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Hundred's digit: DO5 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Thousand's digit: DO6 valid mode.
0, 1 (same as FMR)
Ten thousand's digit: reserved b4-22 b4-23
Frequency detection value (FDT1)
Frequency detection hysteresis (FDT hysteresis 1)
0.00 Hz~ maximum frequency
0.0%~100.0% (FDT1 level)
Default
0
0
0
0
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
00000
00000
50.00 Hz
5.0%
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
151
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b4-24 b4-25 b4-26 b4-27 b4-28
Parameter Name
Frequency detection value (FDT2)
Frequency detection
Setting range
0.00Hz ~ maximum frequency hysteresis (FDT hysteresis 2)
Detection amplitude of frequency reached
0.0%~100.0% (FDT2 level)
0.00~100% (maximum frequency)
Any frequency reaching detection value 1
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
Any frequency reaching detection amplitude 1
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency) b4-29 b4-30 b4-31 b4-32
Any frequency reaching detection value 2
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency
Any frequency reaching detection amplitude 2
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency)
Zero current detection level
Zero current detection delay time
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) b4-33 b4-34
Over current output threshold
Over current output detection delay time
0.0%~300.0% (rated motor current) b4-35 Any current reaching 1 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) b4-36 amplitude of any current reaching 1
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) b4-37 Any current reaching 2 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) b4-38
Amplitude of any current reaching 2
0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) b4-39
Module temperature threshold
Group b5: Pulse/Analog input terminals
b5-00 b5-01
Pulse minimum input(HDI6)
Corresponding setting of pulse minimum input
0.00 kHz ~b5-02
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-02 Pulse maximum input b5-00 ~ 50.00 kHz b5-03 b5-04 b5-05 b5-06 b5-07
Corresponding setting of pulse maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0%
Pulse filter time 0.00s~10.00s
AI1 input voltage lower limit of protection
0.00 V~ b5-06
AI1 input voltage upper limit of protection b5-05~10.00 V
AI1input minimum value
0.00 V ~ b5-15
0.00 kHz
0.00%
50.00 kHz
100.0%
10.00s
3.10 V
6.80 V
0.00 V
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
Default Property
50.00 Hz
☆
5.0%
3.0%
50.00 Hz
3.0%
50.00 Hz
3.0%
5.0%
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
200.0%
☆
100.0%
3.0%
100.0%
3.0%
☆
☆
☆
☆
152
EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b5-08
Parameter Name
Corresponding setting of AI1 minimum input
Setting range
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-09 b5-10 b5-11 b5-12 b5-13 b5-14 b5-15 b5-16 b5-17 b5-18 b5-19
Second point input value of AI1
Corresponding setting of second point input value of AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V
-100.0% ~100.0%
Third point input value of AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V
Corresponding setting of third point input -100.0% ~100.0% value of AI1
Fourth point input value of AI1
0.00 V~10.00 V
Corresponding setting of fourth point input value of AI1
AI1 input maximum value
-100.0% ~100.0%
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
Corresponding setting of AI1 maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0%
AI1input filter time 0.00s~10.00s
Jump point of AI1 input corresponding setting
-100.0% ~100.0%
Jump amplitude of
AI1input corresponding setting
AI2 minimum input 0.00 V ~ 10.00 V b5-20 b5-21 b5-22 b5-23 b5-24 b5-25 b5-26
Corresponding setting of AI2 minimum input
Second point input value of AI2
-100.00% ~100.0%
0.00 V ~10.00 V
Corresponding setting of second point input value of AI2
Third point input value
-100.00% ~100.0%
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V of AI2
Corresponding setting of third point input value of AI2
-100.00% ~100.0%
Fourth point input value of AI2
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V b5-27
Corresponding setting of fourth point input value of AI2
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-28 AI2 maximum input 0.00V~ 10.00 V
50.0%
7.50V
75.0%
10.00 V
100.0%
0.10s
0.0%
Appendix II
Default Property
0.0%
☆
2.50V ☆
25.0%
5.00V
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
0.00 V
0.0%
2.50V
25.0%
5.00V
50.0%
7.50V ☆
75.0% ☆
10.00 V ☆
100.0% ☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
153
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code Parameter Name
of AI2 maximum input b5-30 AI2 input filter time 0.00s~10.00s
Setting range
b5-31
Jump point of AI2 input corresponding setting
Jump amplitude of AI2 input corresponding 0.0% ~100.0% b5-32 setting b5-33 AI3 minimum input 0.00 V~10.00 V b5-34
Corresponding setting of AI3 minimum input b5-35 b5-36
Second point input value of AI3
Corresponding setting of second point input value of AI3
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-37 b5-38 b5-39 b5-40
Third point input value of AI3
Corresponding setting of third point input
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
Corresponding setting of fourth point
-100.00% ~100.0% value of AI3
Fourth point input value of AI3
0.00 V ~ 10.00 V
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-41 AI3 maximum input 0.00 V ~ 10.00 V b5-42
Corresponding setting of AI3 maximum input
-100.00% ~100.0% b5-43 b5-44
AI3 filter time 0.00~10.00s
Jump point of AI3 input corresponding setting
-100.0% ~100.0% b5-45
Jump amplitude of AI3 input corresponding setting
0.0% ~100.0%
Group b6: Pulse/Analog Output Terminals
0: Running frequency corresponding to
0~Max. operation frequency
1: Set frequency corresponding to 0~Max. operation frequency
2: Output current corresponding to b6-00 FMP function selection
0~Doubled motor rated current
3: Output torque (absolute value) corresponding to 0~double rated torque
4: Output power corresponding to
0~Doubled motor rated power
5: Output voltage corresponding to 0~1.2 times DC bus voltage
Default Property
0.10s
☆
0.5%
0.00 V
2.50V
25.0%
5.00V
50.0%
7.50V
75.0%
10.00 V
100.0%
0.10s
0.0%
0.5%
0
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
154
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
Code
b6-01 b6-02
Parameter Name Setting range
AO1 output function selection
AO2 output function selection
6: Motor rotational speed corresponding to
0~Max. operation frequency
7: Output current corresponding to 0~1000A
8: Output voltage corresponding to 0~1000V
9: Output torque corresponding to
(-200%~200%) motor rated torque
10: Pulse input corresponding to
0Hz~100kHz
11: AI1 corresponding to 0~10V
12: AI2 corresponding to 0~10V
13: AI3 corresponding to 0~10V
14: Length corresponding to 0~Length setting value
15: Count value corresponding to 0~Count setting value
16: Communication setting corresponding to
0~32767 b6-03
Maximum FMP output frequency
0.01 kHz ~50.00 kHz b6-04 AO1 offset coefficient -100.0% ~100.0% b6-06 AO2 offset coefficient -100.0% ~100.0%
Default
0
1
Property
☆
☆
50.00 kHz ☆
0.0% ☆
1.00 ☆
0.00% ☆
1.00 ☆
Group b7 : Virtual DI (VDI)/Virtual DO (VDO)
0
0
0
0
0
★
★
★
★
★ b7-05 VDI state setting mode
Unit's digit: VDI1.
0: Valid decided by state of VDOx
1: Valid decided by b7-06
Ten's digit: VDI2.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Hundred's digit: VDI3.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Thousand's digit: VDI4.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Ten thousand's digit: VDI5.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
00000
☆
155
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b7-06 b7-07 b7-08 b7-09 b7-10 b7-11 b7-12 b7-13 b7-14 b7-15 b7-16 b7-17 b7-18 b7-19 b7-20
Parameter Name
VDI state setting
Setting range
Unit's digit: VDI1.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten's digit: VDI2
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Hundred's digit: VDI3
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Thousand's digit: VDI4
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Ten thousand's digit: VDI5.
0, 1 (same as VDI1)
Function selection for
AI1 used as DI
Function selection for
AI2 used as DI
Function selection for
AI3 used as DI
Valid state selection for
AI used as DI
Unit's digit: AI1.
0: High level valid
1: Low level valid
Ten's digit: AI2.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Hundred's digit: AI3.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
VDO1 function selection
VDO2 function selection
VDO3 function selection
0: connect with physical DIx internally
1~38
0: connect with physical DIx internally
1~38
0: connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
VDO4 function selection
VDO5 function selection
0:connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
0: connect with physical Dix internally
1~38
VDO1 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s
VDO2 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s
VDO3 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s
VDO4 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s
VDO5 output delay 0.0s~3000.0s
Default Property
00000
0
38
38
38
38
38
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
0.0s
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
156
EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b7-21 b8-00 b8-01 b8-02 b8-03 b8-04 b8-05 b8-06 b8-07 b8-08 b8-09 b8-10 b8-11 b8-12 b8-13 b8-14 b8-15 b8-16
Parameter Name
VDO valid state selection
Setting range
Unit's digit: VDO1.
0: Positive logic valid
1: Reverse logic valid
Ten's digit: VDO2
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Hundred's digit: VDO3.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Thousand's digit: VDO4.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Ten thousand's digit: VDO5.
0, 1 (same as unit's digit)
Group b8: AI/AO Correction
Ideal voltage of AI1 calibration 1
Sampling voltage of
AI1 calibration 1
Ideal voltage of AI1 calibration 2
Sampling voltage of
AI1 calibration 2
Ideal voltage of AI2 calibration 1
Sampling voltage of
AI2 calibration 1
Ideal voltage of AI2 calibration 2
Sampling voltage of
AI2 calibration 2
Ideal voltage of AI3 calibration 1
Sampling voltage of
AI3 calibration 1
Ideal voltage of AI3 calibration 2
Sampling voltage of
AI3 calibration 2
Ideal voltage of AO1 calibration 1
Measured voltage of
AO1 calibration 1
Ideal voltage of AO1 calibration 2
Measured voltage of
AO1calibration 2
Ideal voltage of AO2 calibration 1
0.500~4.000 V
0.500~4.000 V
6.000~9.999 V
6.000~9.999 V
0.500~4.000 V
0.500~4.000 V
6.000~9.999 V
6.000~9.999 V
0.500~4.000 V
0.500~4.000 V
6.000~9.999 V
6.000~9.999 V
0.500~4.000 V
0.500~4.000 V
6.000~9.999 V
6.000~9.999 V
0.500~4.000 V
Appendix II
Default Property
00000 ☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
8.000V
2.000V
2.000V
8.000V
8.000V
8.000V
8.000V
2.000V
2.000V
8.000V
2.000V
2.000V
2.000V
8.000V
8.000V
2.000V
2.000V
157
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b8-17 b8-18 b8-19 b9-00 b9-01 b9-02
Parameter Name
Measured voltage of
AO2 calibration 1
Ideal voltage of AO2 calibration 2
Measured voltage of
AO2 calibration 2
0.500~4.000 V
6.000~9.999 V
6.000~9.999 V
Setting range
STOP/RESET key function
MF.K Key function selection
LED display running parameters 1
Group b9: Keypad and Display
0: STOP/RESET key enabled only in operation panel control
1: STOP/RESET key enabled in any operation mode
0: MF.K key disabled
1: Switchover between operation panel control and remote command control
(terminal or communication)
2: Switchover between forward rotation and reverse rotation
3: Forward JOG
4: Reverse JOG
0000~FFFF
Bit00: Running frequency 1 (Hz)
Bit01: Set frequency (Hz)
Bit02: DC Bus voltage (V)
Bit03: Output voltage (V)
Bit04: Output current (A)
Bit05: Output power (kW)
Bit06: Output torque (%)
Bit07: DI input status
Bit08: DO output status
Bit09: AI1 voltage (V)
Bit10: AI2 voltage (V)
Bit11: AI3 voltage (V)
Bit12: Count value
Bit13: Length value
Bit14: Load speed display
Bit15: PID setting
Default Property
2.000V
☆
8.000V
8.000V
0
0
0x1f
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
158
EM11 User’s Manual
Code
b9-03 b9-04 b9-05 b9-06
Parameter Name
LED display running parameters 2
LED display parameter of stopping
Setting range
0000~FFFF
Bit00: PID feedback
Bit01: PLC stage
Bit02: Pulse input frequency (kHz)
Bit03: Running frequency 2 (Hz)
Bit04: Remaining running time
Bit05: AI1 voltage before calibration (V)
Bit06: AI2 voltage before calibration (V)
Bit07: AI3 voltage before calibration (V)
Bit08: Linear speed
Bit09: present power-on time (Hour)
Bit10: present running time (Min)
Bit11: Heat sink temperature display (℃)
Bit12: Communication setting value
Bit13: Encoder feedback frequency (Hz)
Bit14: Main frequency X display (Hz)
Bit15: Auxiliary frequency Y display (Hz)
0000~FFFF
Bit00: Set frequency (Hz)
Bit01: Bus voltage (V)
Bit02: DI input status
Bit03: DO output status
Bit04: AI1 voltage (V)
Bit05: AI2 voltage (V)
Bit06: AI3 voltage (V)
Bit07: Count value
Bit08: Length value
Bit09: PLC stage
Bit10: Load speed
Bit11: PID setting
Bit12: Pulse setting frequency(kHz)
Bit13:Heatsink temperature display(°C)
Load speed display coefficient
0.0001~ 6.5000
Number of decimal places for load speed display
0: 0 decimal display
1: 1 decimal display
2: 2 decimal display
3: 3 decimal display b9-08 b9-09 b9-10 bA-00
Accumulative power-on time
0~65535 h
Accumulative running time
0~65535 h
Accumulative power consumption
0~65535 kWh selection
Group bA: Communication Parameters
Communication type
0: Modbus protocol
Appendix II
Default Property
0x0800
0x2033
1.0000
1
0°C
0 h
0 h
0 kWh
0
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
●
●
●
☆
159
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bA-01 bA-02 bA-03
Parameter Name
Baud ratio setting
Modbus Data format
Broadcast address
Setting range
Unit's digit: Modbus baud ratio.
0: 300 BPS
1: 600 BPS
2: 1200 BPS
3: 2400 BPS
4: 4800 BPS
5: 9600 BPS
6: 19200 BPS
7: 38400 BPS
0: No check, data format <8,N,2>
1: Even parity check, data format<8,E,1>
2: Odd Parity check, data format<8,O,1>
3: No check, data format <8,N,1>
Valid for Modbus
0~247 (0: Broadcast address)
Valid for Modbus bA-04 Modbus response delay bA-05 Communication timeout
0~20 ms
Only valid for Modbus
0.0s:invalid
0.1s~60.0s
Valid for Modbus bA-06 bA-07 bb-00 bb-01 bb-02 bb-03
Modbus protocol data transmission format selection
Unit's digit: Modbus protocol.
0: Non-standard Modbus protocol
1: Standard Modbus protocol
Communication reading 0: 0.01A current resolution 1: 0.1A
Group bb: Fault and Protection Setting
G/P type selection
0: P type
1: G type
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Motor overload protection selection
Motor overload protection gain
Motor overload pre-warning coefficient bb-05 bb-10
Overvoltage stall protective voltage bb-06 Over current stall gain 0~100 bb-07
Over current stall protective current bb-08
Protection of short-circuit to ground
0: Disabled
1: Enabled after power-on bb-09 Fault auto reset times 0~99
Relay action selection during fault auto reset
0: Not act
1: Act
Default Property
5
0
1
2 ms
0.0s
1
0
1
0
0
20
1
0
0
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
160
EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bb-11
Parameter Name
Time interval of fault auto reset
Input phase loss
Setting range
bb-12 bb-13 bb-14 protection/contactor energizing protection selection
Output phase loss protection
Off load protection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
1: Enabled bb-15 Off load detection level 0.0%~100.0% (rated motor current) bb-16 Off load detection time 0.0s~60.0s bb-17
Over-speed detection value
0.0%~50.0% (maximum frequency) bb-18
Over-speed detection time bb-19
Detection value of too large speed deviation
0.0%~50.0% (maximum frequency) bb-20 bb-21 bb-22 bb-23 bb-24
Detection time of too large speed deviation
Action selection at instantaneous power failure
Voltage rally judging time at instantaneous power failure
Judging voltage of instantaneous power failure
Judging voltage of instantaneous power failure restoring
0: Invalid
1: Decelerate
2: Decelerate to stop
0.00s ~100.00s
60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage)
60.0%~100.0% (standard bus voltage) bb-25
Type of motor temperature sensor
0: No temperature sensor
1: PT100
2: PT1000 bb-26
Motor overheat protection threshold bb-27
Motor overheat pre-warning threshold bb-28 Overvoltage threshold 200.0~2500.0 V bb-30 bb-31
Brake unit use ratio 0%~100%
Rapid current limit
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Default
0
0
0
1.0%
1.0s
20.0%
20.0%
0
0.00s
80.0%
90.0%
0
Appendix II
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
830.0 V ☆
100.0%
☆
100% ☆
1
☆
161
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bb-32 bb-33 bb-34
Parameter Name
Fault protection action selection 1
Setting range
Unit's digit: Motor overload, Err11.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
2: Continue to run
Ten's digit: Power input phase loss, Err12.
Same as unit's digit
Hundred's digit: Power output phase loss,
Err13.
Same as unit's digit
Thousand's digit: External equipment fault,
Err15.
Same as unit's digit
Ten thousand's digit: Communication fault,
Err16.
Same as unit's digit
Fault protection action selection 2
Unit's digit: Encoder/PG card fault, Err20.
0: Free stop
Ten's digit: EEPROM read-write fault,
Err21.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
Hundred's digit : Reserved
Thousand's digit: Motor Overheat, Err25.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten thousand's digit: Running time reached,
Err26.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Fault protection action selection 3
Unit's digit: User-defined fault 1,Err27.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten's digit: User-defined fault 2,Err28.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Hundred's digit: Accumulative power-on time reached,Err29.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Thousand's digit: Off load, Err30.
0: Free stop
1: Stop according to the stop mode
2: reduce to 7% of rated motor frequency and continue running. If the load recovers and it will auto regain to setting frequency.
Ten thousand's digit: PID feedback lost during running, Err31.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Default Property
00000
00000
00000
☆
☆
☆
162
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
Code
bb-35
Parameter Name Setting range
Fault protection action selection 4
Unit's digit: Speed deviation too large, Err42
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Ten's digit: Motor over-speed, Err43.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Hundred's digit: Initial position fault, Err51.
Same as unit's digit in bb-32
Default
00000
Property
☆ bb-36 bb-37 bC-06 bC-07 bC-08 bC-09
0: Current running frequency
Frequency selection for 1: Set frequency continuing to run of fault
2: Frequency upper limit
3: Frequency lower limit
4: Backup frequency of abnormality (bb-37)
Backup frequency of abnormality
0.0%~100.0% (maximum frequency)
Group bC: Fault diagnosis
– ●
– ●
– ● bC-02 3rd fault type (latest) – bC-03 Frequency of latest fault – bC-04 Current of latest fault – bC-05
–
–
●
●
DC Bus voltage of latest fault
●
Input terminals status of latest fault
Output terminal status of latest fault
Frequency inverter status of latest fault
Power-on time of latest fault
0
1.0%
☆
☆ bC-10 bC-13
Running time of latest fault bC-11 Frequency of 2nd fault – bC-12 Current of 2nd fault –
DC Bus voltage of 2nd fault bC-14 bC-15 bC-16
Input terminal status of
2nd fault
Output terminal status of 2nd fault
Frequency inverter status of 2nd fault bC-17
Power-on time of 2nd fault bC-18
Running time of 2nd fault bC-19 Frequency of 1st fault – bC-20 Current of 1st fault –
–
–
–
–
●
●
●
●
163
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
bC-21 bC-22 bC-23
Parameter Name
DC Bus voltage of 1st fault
Input terminal status of
1st fault
Output terminal status of 1st fault
Setting range Default Property
bC-24 bC-25 bC-26
Frequency inverter status of 1st fault
Power-on time of 1st fault
Running time of 1st fault
– –
Group C0: PID Control Function
C0-00 PID setting source
0: C0-01
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
C0-01 PID digital setting
6: Multi-function
0.0%~100.0%
C0-02 PID setting change time 0.00s~650.00s
0
50.0%
0.00s
☆
☆
☆
C0-03 PID feedback source
0: AI1
1: AI2
2: AI3
3: Pulse setting (HDI)
4: AI1 – AI2
5: AI1 + AI2
6: MAX (|AI1|, |AI2|)
C0-04 PID action direction
7: MIN (|AI1|, |AI2|)
8: Communication setting
0: Forward action
1: Reverse action
C0-05
PID setting feedback range
C0-06 Proportional gain KP1 0.00~10.0
C0-07 Integral time TI1 0.01s~10.00s
C0-08 Differential time TD1 0.000s~10.000s
C0-09 Proportional gain KP2 0.00~10.00
C0-10 Integral time TI2 0.01s~10.00s
C0-11 Differential time TD2 0.00s~10.00s
C0-12
PID parameter switchover condition
0: No switchover
1: Switchover via DI
2: Automatic switchover based on deviation
C0-13
C0-14
PID parameter switchover deviation 1
PID parameter
0.0% ~ C0-14
C0-13 ~ 100.0%
0
0
20.0
2.00s
0.000s
20.0
2.00s
0.000s
0
20.0%
80.0%
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
164
EM11 User’s Manual
Code Parameter Name
switchover deviation 2
Setting range
C0-15
C0-16
C0-17
C0-18
PID integral property
Unit's digit: Integral separated.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
Ten's digit: Whether to stop integral operation when the output reaches the limit.
0: Continue integral operation
1: Stop integral operation
PID initial value 0.0%~100.0%
PID initial value holding time
Frequency upper limit of PID reverse rotation
0.00 ~ maximum frequency
C0-20 PID differential limit 0.00%~100.00%
C0-21
Maximum positive deviation between two
PID outputs
Maximum negative
C0-22 deviation between two
PID outputs
C0-23 PID feedback filter time 0.00s~60.00s
C0-24 PID output filter time 0.00s~60.00s
C0-25
C0-26
C0-27
Detection value of PID feedback loss
0.0%: Not judging feedback loss
0.1%~100.0%
Detection time of PID feedback loss
PID operation at stop
0: No PID operation at stop
1: PID operation at stop
Group C1: Multi-function
C1-00 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-01 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-02 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-03 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-04 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-05 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-06 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-07 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-08 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-09 Multi-function -100.0%~100.0%
C1-16 Multi-function 0 source 0: Set by C1-00
Appendix II
Default Property
00
0.0%
2.00 Hz
☆
0.0%
☆
0.10%
☆
0.00s
0.00s
0.0%
0
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0%
☆
0.0% ☆
0.0%
☆
0.0% ☆
0.0% ☆
0.0%
☆
0 ☆
165
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
C2-00
C2-01
C2-02
C2-03
C2-04
C2-05
C2-06
C2-07
C2-08
C2-09
C2-10
C2-11
C2-12
Parameter Name
Simple PLC running mode
Simple PLC record selection
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 0
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 0
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 1
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 1
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 2
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 2
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 3
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 3
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 4
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 4
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 5
Setting range
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: PID
6: Set by preset frequency (b0-12), modified via terminal UP/ DOWN
Group C2: Simple PLC
0: Stop after the Frequency inverter runs one cycle
1: Keep final values after the frequency inverter runs one cycle
2: Repeat after the frequency inverter runs one cycle
Unit's digit: Record of power failure.
0: no record after power off
1: record after power off
Ten's digit: Record of stopping.
0: no record after stopping
1:record after stopping
Default Property
0
00
☆
☆
166
Code
C2-13
C2-14
C2-15
C2-16
C2-17
C2-18
C2-19
C2-20
C2-21
C2-22
C2-23
C2-24
C2-25
C2-26
C2-27
C2-28
C2-29
C2-30
C2-31
Parameter Name
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 5
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 6
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 6
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 7
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 7
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 8
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 8
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 9
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 9
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 10
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 10
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 11
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 11
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 12
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 12
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 13
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 13
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 14
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
EM11 User’s Manual
Setting range
Appendix II
Default Property
167
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
C2-32
C2-33
C2-34
C3-00
C3-01
Parameter Name
Segment 14
Running time of simple
PLC Segment 15
Setting range
Acceleration/deceleratio n time of simple PLC
Segment 15
Time unit of simple
PLC running
0: s (second)
1: h (hour)
Group C3: Swing Frequency, Fixed Length and Count
Swing frequency setting 0: Relative to the central frequency mode
Swing frequency
1: Relative to the maximum frequency amplitude
C3-02
Textile jump frequency amplitude of Swing running
C3-03 Swing frequency cycle 0.1s~3000.0s
C3-04
Triangular wave rising time coefficient
C3-05 Set length 0m~65535 m
C3-06
C3-07
Actual length
Number of pulses per meter
Set count value
0m~65535 m
C3-08 1~65535
C3-09 Designated count value 1~65535
Group d0: Motor 1 Parameters
d0-00 d0-01
Rated motor power 0.1kw~1000.0 kW
Rated motor voltage 1V~2000 V
Default
0
0
10.0s
1000 m
0 m
1000
1000
Model dependent
Model dependent
Property
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
★
★
0.01A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power
Model dependent
★
≥75 kW) d0-03 Rated motor frequency 0.01 Hz~ maximum frequency d0-04
Rated motor rotational speed
1rpm~65535rpm d0-05
Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~6.5535 Ω (frequency inverter power ≥75 kW) d0-06 d0-07
Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Leakage inductive 0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter reactance (asynchronous power≤ 55 kW)
50.00Hz
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
★
★
★
★
★
168
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
Code
d0-08 d0-09 d0-15 d0-16 d0-17 d0-18 d0-19
Parameter Name
motor)
Setting range
0.001mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Mutual inductive reactance (asynchronous motor)
0.1mH~6553.5 mH (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
No-load current
(asynchronous motor)
Stator resistance
(synchronous motor)
0.01A ~ d0-02 (Frequency inverter power
≤55 kW)
0.1A to d0-02 (Frequency inverter power
≥75 kW)
0.001 Ω ~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001 Ω ~ 6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Shaft D inductance
(synchronous motor)
Shaft Q inductance
(synchronous motor)
0.01 mH ~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.001~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
0.01 mH ~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.001 mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Back EMF
(synchronous motor)
Encoder pulses per revolution
0.1V~6553.5 V
0: ABZ incremental encoder
1: Resolver
Default
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Property
★
★
★
★
★
★
0 ★ d0-21 d0-22 d0-23 d0-24 d0-28 d0-29 d0-30
3: Reserved
4: Wire-saving UVW encoder
A/B phase sequence of
ABZ incremental encoder
0: Forward
1: Reserve
Encoder installation angle
U, V, W phase sequence 0: Forward of UVW encoder
UVW encoder angle
1: Reverse offset
Number of pole pairs of resolver
Encoder wire-break fault detection time
0.0s: No action
0.1s~10.0s
Motor 1 auto-tuning selection
0: No auto-tuning
1: Asynchronous motor static auto-tuning
2: Asynchronous motor complete
0
0
0.0s
0
★
★
★
★
169
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d1-00 d1-01
Parameter Name Setting range
auto-tuning
11: Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning
12: Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning
Group d1: Vector Control Parameters
Speed/Torque control 0: Speed control selection
Speed loop proportional
1: Torque control gain 1(Kp1) d1-02
Speed loop integral time
1(Ti1) d1-03 Switchover frequency 1 0.00 ~ d1-06 d1-04
Speed loop proportional gain 2(KP2) d1-05
Speed loop integral time
2(Ti2) d1-06 Switchover frequency 2 d1-03~ maximum output frequency d1-07
Speed loop integral property
0: Integral separation disabled
1: Integral separation enabled d1-08 ASR input filtering time 0.000s~0.100s d1-09
ASR output filtering time d1-10 d1-11 d1-12 d1-13
Excitation current loop proportional gain
Excitation current loop integral gain
Torque current loop proportional gain
Torque current loop integral gain d1-14 d1-15
Motor running torque upper limit source in speed control mode
Braking torque upper limit source in speed control mode
0: d1-16
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
0: d1-17
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting d1-16 d1-17
Digital setting of motor running torque limit
Digital setting of braking torque limit
Default
0
5.00 Hz
10.00 Hz
0
0.000s
0
0
Property
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
170
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
Code Parameter Name
d1-18 Motor running slip gain 50%~200% d1-19 Braking slip gain 50%~200% d1-20 d1-21 d1-22 d1-23 d1-24 d1-25 d1-26 d1-27
Setting range
Torque limit coefficient in field weakening area
PM field weakening mode of synchronous
0: Invalid field weakening
1: Direct calculation
2: Automatic adjustment motor
PM field weakening depth of synchronous motor
Maximum current of
PM field weakening
PM Field weakening automatic adjustment gain
PM Field weakening integral multiple
0: Digital setting (d1-27)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
Torque setting source in 4: Pulse setting (DI6) torque control 5: Communication setting
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Full range of values 1~7 corresponds to the digital setting of d1-27.
Torque digital setting in torque control d1-28 d1-29 d1-30 d1-31
Forward speed limit in torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: Communication setting
Reverse speed limit in torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: Communication setting
Forward maximum frequency in torque control
Reverse maximum frequency in torque control
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13)
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13)
Default
100%
100%
1
0
0
0
50.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
Property
☆
☆
☆
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
171
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d1-32 d1-33 d2-00
Parameter Name
Acceleration time in torque control
Deceleration time in torque control
Setting range
Group d2: V/F Control Parameters
V/F curve setting
0: Linear V/F
1: Multi-point V/F
2: Square V/F
3: 1.2-power V/F
4: 1.4-power V/F
6: 1.6-power V/F
8: 1.8-power V/F
10: V/F complete separation
11: V/F half separation
Default
0
0 d2-02 d2-03 d2-04 d2-05 d2-06
Cut-off frequency of torque boost
0.0%~80.0%
Actual cut-off frequency= Motor rated frequency*(d2-02)
Multi-point V/F frequency 1 (F1)
0.00 Hz ~ d2-05
Multi-point V/F voltage
1 (V1)
Multi-point V/F frequency 2 (F2) d2-03 to d2-07
Multi-point V/F voltage
2 (V2) d2-07 d2-08 d2-09 d2-10
Multi-point V/F frequency 3 (F3)
Multi-point V/F voltage
3 (V3) d2-05 ~ maximum frequency
V/F slip compensation coefficient
V/F oscillation suppression gain d2-12
Voltage source for V/F separation
0: Digital setting (d2-13)
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Multi-function
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
8: Communication setting
(Note: 100.0% corresponds to the rated motor voltage) d2-13 Voltage digital setting 0 V ~ rated motor voltage
50.0%
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0
0 V
Property
★
☆
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
172
EM11 User’s Manual Appendix II
Code
d2-14 d3-00 d3-01
Parameter Name
for V/F separation
Setting range
Voltage rise time of V/F separation
0.0s~1000.0s
Note: It indicates the time for the voltage rising from 0 V ~ rated motor voltage.
Group d3: Motor 2 Parameters
Rated motor power 0.1kw~1000.0 kW
Rated motor voltage 1V~2000 V
Default
0.0s
Model dependent
Model dependent
Property
☆
★
★
0.01A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power
Model dependent
★
≥75 kW) d3-03 Rated motor frequency 0.01 Hz~ maximum frequency d3-04
Rated motor rotational speed
1rpm~65535rpm d3-05
Stator resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001Ω~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001Ω~6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW) d3-06 d3-07 d3-08 d3-09 d3-15 d3-16 d3-17
Rotor resistance
(asynchronous motor)
0.001Ω~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.0001Ω~6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Leakage inductive reactance (asynchronous motor)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.001mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Mutual inductive reactance (asynchronous motor)
0.1mH~6553.5 mH (Frequency inverter power ≤ 55 kW)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
No-load current
(asynchronous motor)
Stator resistance
(synchronous motor)
0.01 A ~ d3-02 (Frequency inverter power ≤
55 kW)
0.1 A ~ d3-02 (Frequency inverter power
≥75 kW)
0.001Ω~65.535 Ω (Frequency inverter power ≤ 55 kW)
0.0001Ω~6.5535 Ω (Frequency inverter power ≥75 kW)
Shaft D inductance
(synchronous motor)
Shaft Q inductance
(synchronous motor)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter power ≤ 55 kW)
0.001mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter power ≥ 75 kW)
0.01mH~655.35 mH (Frequency inverter power≤ 55 kW)
0.001mH~65.535 mH (Frequency inverter
50.00Hz
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
173
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d3-18 d3-19
Parameter Name Setting range
power ≥75 kW)
Back EMF
(synchronous motor)
Encoder pulses per revolution
0.1V~6553.5 V
0: ABZ incremental encoder
1: Resolver d3-21 d3-22 d3-23 d3-24 d3-28 d3-29
3: Reversed
4: Wire-saving UVW encoder
A, B phase sequence of
ABZ incremental encoder
Encoder installation angle
0: Forward
1: Reserve
0.0°~ 359.9°
U, V, W phase sequence 0: Forward of UVW encoder
UVW encoder angle
1: Reverse offset
Number of pole pairs of
0.0°~ 359.9° resolver
Encoder wire-break fault detection time
0.0s: No action
0.1s~10.0s d3-30 d4-00 d4-01 d4-02
Motor 2 auto-tuning selection
0: No auto-tuning
1: Asynchronous motor static auto-tuning
2: Asynchronous motor complete auto-tuning
11: Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning
12: Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning
Group d4: Motor 2 Vector Control Parameters
Speed/Torque control selection
Speed loop proportional gain 1(Kp1)
0: Speed control
1: Torque control mode
Speed loop integral time
1(Ti1) d4-03 Switchover frequency 1 0.00Hz ~ d4-06 d4-04
Speed loop proportional gain 2(Kp2) d4-05
Speed loop integral time
2(Ti2) d4-06 Switchover frequency 2 d4-03 ~ maximum output frequency d4-07
Speed loop integral property
0: Integral separated disabled
1: Integral separated enabled d4-08 ASR input filtering time 0.000s~0.100s
Default
Model dependent
0
0
0.0°
0
0.0°
0.0s
0
0
5.00 Hz
10.00 Hz
0
Property
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
★
☆
☆
☆
0.000s ☆
0.000s
☆
174
EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d4-10 d4-11 d4-12 d4-13 d4-14 d4-15 d4-16 d4-17
Parameter Name
time
Excitation current loop proportional gain
Excitation current loop integral gain
Torque current loop proportional gain
Torque current loop integral gain
Setting range
Motor-driven torque upper limit source in speed control mode
Braking torque upper limit source in speed control mode
0: d4-16
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5:Communication setting
0: d4-17
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting (DI6)
5: Communication setting
Digital setting of motor-driven torque limit
Digital setting of braking torque limit d4-19 d4-20 d4-21 d4-22 d4-23 d4-24 d4-25
Braking slip gain 50%~200%
Torque limit coefficient in field weakening area
PM Field weakening mode of synchronous motor
0: Invalid field weakening
1: Direct calculation
2: Adjustment
PM Field weakening degree of synchronous motor
Maximum PM field weakening current
PM Field weakening automatic adjustment gain
PM Field weakening integral gain
Appendix II
Default Property
0
0
100%
100%
1
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
175
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d4-26 d4-27 d4-28 d4-29 d4-30 d4-31 d4-32 d4-33 d5-00
Parameter Name Setting range
0: Digital setting (d4-27)
1: AI1
2: AI2
Torque setting source in
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting torque control 5: Communication setting
6: MIN (AI1, AI2)
7: MAX (AI1, AI2)
Full range of values 1~7 corresponds to the digital setting of d4-27.
Torque digital setting in torque control
Forward speed limit in torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting
5: Communication setting
Reverse speed limit in torque control
0: Digital setting
1: AI1
2: AI2
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting
5: Communication setting
Forward maximum frequency in torque control
Reverse maximum frequency in torque control
Acceleration time in torque control
Deceleration time in torque control
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13)
0.00 Hz ~ maximum frequency(b0-13)
Group d5: Motor 2 V/F control parameters
0: Linear V/F
1: Multi-point V/F
2: Square V/F
V/F curve setting
3: 1.2-power V/F
4: 1.4-power V/F
6: 1.6-power V/F
8: 1.8-power V/F
10: V/F complete separation
11: V/F half separation
Default
0
0
0
50.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
0
Property
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
★
0 ☆
176
EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d5-02 d5-03 d5-04 d5-05 d5-06 d5-07 d5-08 d5-09 d5-10 d5-12 d5-13 d5-14
Parameter Name
Cut-off frequency of torque boost
Setting range
0.0%~80.0%
Actual cut-off frequency= Motor rated frequency*d5-02
Multi-point V/F frequency 1 (F1)
Multi-point V/F voltage
1 (V1)
0.00 Hz ~ d5-05
Multi-point V/F frequency 2 (F2) d5-03 ~ d5-07
Multi-point V/F voltage
2 (V2)
Multi-point V/F frequency 3 (F3)
Multi-point V/F voltage
3 (V3) d5-05 ~ Maximum frequency(b0-13)
V/F slip compensation coefficient oscillation suppression gain
0: Digital setting(d5-13)
1: AI1
2: AI2
Voltage source for V/F separation
3: AI3
4: Pulse setting(DI6)
5: Multi-function
6: Simple PLC
7: PID
8: Communication setting Note:100.0% corresponds to the rated motor voltage
Voltage digital setting for V/F separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage
Voltage rise time of V/F separation
0.0s~1000.0s
Note: It indicates the time for the voltage rising from 0 V ~ rated motor voltage.
Group d6: Control Optimization Parameters
d6-00
Carrier frequency 0.5kHz~15.0 kHz d6-02 frequency upper limit
PWM modulation mode
0: Asynchronous modulation
1: Synchronous modulation d6-04 adjustment with temperature
Random PWM depth
1: Yes
0: Random PWM invalid
1~10: Random PWM carrier frequency depth
Default
50.0%
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0
0 V
0.0s
Model dependent
12.00 Hz
0
1
0
Appendix II
Property
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
★
★
☆
☆
177
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
d6-06 d6-07
Parameter Name
compensation mode selection
SVC mode selection
Flux braking gain
Setting range
1: Compensation mode 1
2: Compensation mode 2
0: SVC mode 0
1: SVC mode 1
0~150% d6-08 Flux compensation gain 0~200% (Default value is 100%)
Default
1
1
100%
100% cut-off frequency d6-10 Excitation current loop
KP d6-11 Torque current loop KP 0~500 d6-12 Torque current filtering time coefficient d6-13 No load current boost 0.0%~50.0% d6-14 Cut-off frequency for no load current boost d6-15
Field weakening gain 50%~150%
U0-00
U0-01
U0-02
U0-03
U0-04
U0-05
U0-06
U0-07
U0-08
U0-09
U0-10
U0-11
Group U0: Standard Monitoring Parameters
Running frequency 0.00~300.00 Hz (b0-11 = 2)
Setting frequency 0.00~3000.0 Hz (b0-11 = 1)
DC Bus voltage 0.0~3000.0 V
Output voltage
Output current
Output power
Output torque
0V~1140 V
0.00A~655.35 A (Frequency inverter power
≤ 55 kW)
0.0A~6553.5 A (Frequency inverter power > 55 kW)
0~32767
-200.0%~200.0%
DI state
DO state
AI1 voltage
AI2 voltage
AI3 voltage
-0~32767
0~1023
-
-
-
U0-12
U0-13
U0-14
U0-15
U0-16
U0-17
Count value
Length value
-
-
Load speed display 0~65535
PID setting
0~65535
PID feedback
0~65535
PLC stage -
U0-18 Input pulse frequency 0.00kHz ~100.00 kHz
U0-19
Feedback speed, unit:0.01Hz
-3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
-300.00Hz~300.00 Hz
U0-20 Remaining running time 0.0min~6500.0 min
U0-21
AI1 voltage before correction
0.00V~10.57 V
0
10.0%
100%
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Property
☆
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
178
Code
U0-22
U0-23
EM11 User’s Manual
Parameter Name
AI2 voltage before correction
AI3 voltage before correction
Setting range
0.00V~10.57 V
-10.57V~10.57 V
U0-26 Present running time -
U0-27
Communication setting value
U0-28 Encoder feedback speed
-3000.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
-300.00Hz~300.00 Hz
U0-31
U0-32
0.00Hz~300.00 Hz
0.0Hz~3000.0 Hz
Viewing any register address value
Synchronous motor rotor position
0.0°~ 359.9°
U0-36 Power factor angle -
U0-38
U0-39
U0-40
U0-41
U0-42
U0-43
Target voltage of V/F separation
0 V ~ rated motor voltage
Output voltage of V/F separation
DI input state visual display
DO output state visual display
DI function state visual display 1
0 V ~ rated motor voltage
DO function state visual display
U0-45 Phase Z signal counting -
U0-46
Present setting frequency (%)
-100.00%~100.00%
U0-47
Present running frequency (%)
-100.00%~100.00%
U0-48
Frequency inverter running state
0~65535
U0-49
Sent value of point-point communication
-100.00%~100.00%
Appendix II
Default Property
- ●
- ●
- ●
-
-
●
●
-
-
-
●
●
●
- ●
- ●
- ●
-
-
●
●
- ●
- ●
- ●
-
-
-
-
-
-
●
●
●
●
●
●
179
Appendix II EM11 User’s Manual
Code
U0-50
A0-00
A0-01
A0-02
A0-03
A0-04
Parameter Name
Received value of point-point communication
User password
Product number
Software version
Rated current
Rated voltage
Group A0: System Parameters
0~65535
-
-
Setting range
-100.00%~100.00%
Frequency inverter product number
Software version of control board
A0-07
Parameter modification property
0: Modifiable
1: Not modifiable
A0-08
Individualized parameter display property
Unit's digit: User-defined parameter QUICK display selection.
0: Not display
1: Display
Ten's digit: User-changed parameter QUICK display selection.
0: Not display
1: Display
A0-09 Restore default settings
0: No operation
1: Restore default settings except motor parameters and accumulation record.
2: Restore default settings for all parameters
3: Reserve
4: Clear records
Other: Reserve
Group A1: User-defined Parameters
A1-00
User-defined function code 0
User visible function codes
A1-01
A1-02
A1-03
A1-04
User-defined function code 1
User-defined function code 2
User-defined function code 3
User-defined function code 4
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
A1-05
A1-06
A1-07
User-defined function code 5
User-defined function code 6
User-defined function code 7
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
Default
-
0
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
Model dependent
0
0
0 ub0.01 ub0.02 ub0.03 ub0.07 ub0.12 ub0.21 ub0.22 ub3.00
Property
●
☆
●
●
●
●
☆
☆
★
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
180
EM11 User’s Manual
Code
A1-08
A1-09
A1-10
A1-11
A1-12
A1-13
A1-14
A1-15
A1-16
A1-17
A1-18
A1-19
A1-20
A1-21
A1-22
A1-23
A1-24
A1-25
A1-26
A1-27
A1-28
A1-29
A1-30
A1-31
Parameter Name
User-defined function code 8
User-defined function code 9
User-defined function code 10
User-defined function code 11
User-defined function code 12
User-defined function code 13
User-defined function code 14
User-defined function code 15
User-defined function code 16
User-defined function code 17
User-defined function code 18
User-defined function code 19
User-defined function code 20
User-defined function code 21
User-defined function code 22
User-defined function code 23
User-defined function code 24
User-defined function code 25
User-defined function code 26
User-defined function code 27
User-defined function code 28
User-defined function code 29
User-defined function code 30
User-defined function code 31
Setting range
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
User visible function codes
Appendix II
Default Property
ub3.01
☆ ub3.02 ub4.04 ub6.01 ub1.00 ub1.10
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆ uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00 ud2.00 ud2.01 uA0.00 uA0.00 uA0.00
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
☆
181
Warranty Agreement
1) The warranty period of the product is 12 months (refer to the barcode of nameplate). During the warranty period, if the product fails or is damaged under the condition of normal use by following the instructions, EMHEATER will be responsible for free maintenance.
2) Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damages caused by the following reasons:
A. Improper use or repair/modification without prior permission;
B. Fire, flood, abnormal voltage, other disasters and secondary disaster;
C. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement;
D. Improper operation;
E. Trouble out of the frequency inverter (for example, external device).
3) If there is any failure or damage to the product, please correctly fill out the Product Warranty Card in detail.
4) The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of EMHEATER.
5) The Product Warranty Card is not re-issued. Please keep the card and present it to the maintenance personnel when asking for maintenance.
6) If there is any problem during the service, contact EMHEATER’s agent or EMHEATER directly.
7) This agreement shall be interpreted by China EM Technology Limited.
Product Warranty Card
Company address:
Customer
Information
Company Name:
Post Code:
Product model:
Product
information
Body barcode (Attach here):
Name of agent:
Contact Person:
Tel:
Failure information
(Maintenance time and content):
Maintenance personnel:

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement